kia, tthe ccompany
Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the
owner of a Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of ques-
tions about your vehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”,
“Who is Kia?”, “What does ‘Kia’ mean?”.
Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in
Korea. It is a company that has thousands of employees focused
on building high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.
The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to
the world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syl-
lable, a, means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from”
or “to come up out of Asia to the world.”
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained
technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia
replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete sat-
isfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important infor-
mation as well, this publication should remain with the
vehicle if it is sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, main-
tenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It
is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer
Information manual that provides important information
on all warranties regarding your vehicle. If your vehicle
is equipped with an audio system, you will also have a
Kia Integrated Audio System manual explaining its oper-
ation. We urge you to read these publications carefully
and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable
and safe operation of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and fea-
tures for its various models.
Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along
with the various illustrations, may not all be applicable to
your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this man-
ual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the
right to discontinue or change specifications or design at
any time without notice and without incurring any obli-
gation. If you have questions, always check with your
Kia Dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motor-
ing pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2005 Kia Motors America, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated
in whole or in part without the written consent of Kia
Motors America, Inc.
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Knowing your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
Driving tips
In case of an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications
Consumer assistance (U.S. only)
10
Index
table of contents
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
How to use this manual / 1-2
Vehicle break-in process / 1-3
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. Especially, in order to
prevent death or injury, at the very
least, you must read the WARNING
and CAUTION sections spread
throughout the manual, which are
easily recognized by their special
markings listed.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you learn about features,
important safety information, and
driving tips under various road condi-
tions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents. A
good place to start is the index; it has
an alphabetical listing of all informa-
tion in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You’ll find various WARNING’s,
CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this
manual. These WARNING’s,
CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s were pre-
pared to enhance your personal
safety and continued satisfaction
with Kia vehicle. You should carefully
read and follow ALL procedures and
recommendations provided in these
WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and
NOTICE’s.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the notice is ignored.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning
is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which personal injury, perhaps
severe, could result if the caution
is ignored.
10
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
No special break-in period is need-
ed. By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 600 miles (1,000
km) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
• Do not race the engine.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Exterior overview / 2-2
Interior overview / 2-4
Instrument panel overview / 2-5
Your vehicle at a glance
10
10
Your vehicle at a glance
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Headlight (high beam)
2. Headlights (low beam)
3. Turn signal light
4. Side mark light
5. Engine hood
6. Inside rearview mirror
7. Seat
8. Steering wheel
9. Door
10. Outside rearview mirror
2GHN0001
10
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Rear door child safety lock
2. Fuel filler lid
3. Rear window
4. Trunk release lever and key lock
5. Spare tire
6. Outside rearview mirror
7. Tail lights
8. High mounted stop light
9. Door handle (driver)
10. Door handle (passenger)
11. Emergency trunk release lever
2GHN0002
10
Your vehicle at a glance
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button
2. Power window switches
3. Outside rearview mirror control switch
4. Seat adjust knob
5. Hood release lever
6. Parking brake pedal
7. Parking brake release lever
8. Instrument panel illumination
9. Steering wheel
10. Instrument cluster
11. Inside rearview mirror
12. Trunk release lever
13. Fuel filler lid release button
14. Seat
15. Master power door lock control
16. Master power window control lock
17. Brake pedal
18. Accelerator pedal
19. Vent controls
20. Steering wheel tilt
2GHN0005
10
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Driver’s Air Bag
2. Light control / Turn signals
3. Instrument cluster
4. Wiper/Washer
5. Ignition switch
6. Seat warmer
7. Traction control system (if equipped)
/ Electronic stability program
(if equipped)
8. Hazard
9. Rear climate control selection button
10. Climate control system
11. Shift lever
12. Passenger’s airbag
13. Glove box
14. Trunk lid control button
15. Audio controls (if equipped)
16. Auto cruise controls (if equipped)
17. Coin holders
18. Multi-Function Display (if equipped)
2GHN0004
RES
ACCEL
COAST
SET
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
TCS
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Keys / 3-2
Remote keyless entry / 3-4
Immobilizer system / 3-7
Door locks / 3-9
Window / 3-14
Seat / 3-18
Driver position memory system / 3-34
Safety belts / 3-36
Air bags-advanced supplemental restraint
system / 3-60
Trunk / 3-84
Hood / 3-88
Fuel filler lid / 3-89
Mirrors / 3-92
Interior lights / 3-97
Storage compartment / 3-99
Interior features / 3-102
Sunroof / 3-108
Antenna / 3-111
Knowing your vehicle
10
Knowing your vehicle
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The key code number is stamped on
the plate attached to the key set.
Should you lose your keys, this num-
ber will enable an authorized Kia
Dealer to duplicate the keys easily.
Remove the plate and store it in a
safe place. Also, record the code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
➀ Master key
Used to start the engine, lock and
unlock the doors, lock and unlock
the glove box, and open the trunk.
➁ Sub key
Used only to start the engine and
lock and unlock the door.
➂ Transmitter
Used to lock and unlock the doors
and trunk (trunk can only be
opened with the transmitter when
the trunk lid control button located
in the glove compartment is
turned on. See page 3-3).
KEYS
2GHN2104C
2GHN2104B
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the ignition key is
dangerous even if the key is not
in the ignition. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition. The ignition
key would enable children to
operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even
death. Never leave the keys in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children.
➀
➁➂
33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot
and valet attendants, the following
procedures will ensure that your
vehicle’s trunk and glove box com-
partment can not be opened in your
absence.
1. Unlock the glove box with the mas-
ter key and open it.
2. Set the trunk lid control button in
the glove box compartment to
OFF (not depressed). In the OFF
position, the trunk can not be
unlocked with either the trunk
release lever inside the car or
trunk open button of transmitter.
3. Close the glove box, and lock the
glove box using the master key.
4. Leave the sub key with the atten-
dant. Trunk and glove box are
secured because sub key only
allows engine start and door lock
and unlock.
CAUTION
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return
to ON after START. If this hap-
pens, the starter will continue to
operate causing damage to the
starter motor and possible fire
due to excessive current in the
wiring.
1GHA2004
Knowing your vehicle
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
➀ Lock button
➁ Unlock button
➂ Trunk lid open button
➃
Panic button
➀ Lock ( )
All doors are locked and the haz-
ard lamp will flash once if the lock
button is pressed. Also, the trunk
is locked and cannot be opened
with the outside handle.
➁ Unlock ( )
Driver’s door is unlocked and the
hazard lamp will flash twice if the
unlock button is pressed once.
Also, the trunk is unlocked and
can be opened with the outside
handle. All doors are unlocked if
the unlock button is pressed twice
within 3 seconds.
After depressing this button, the
doors will be locked automatically
unless you open them within 30
seconds.
➂ Trunk lid open ( )
The trunk lid opens if this button is
pressed. If this button is pressed
while all the doors are locked, the
trunk will open, however it will
remain locked when closed.
If any door is unlocked, the trunk
will remain unlocked when closed.
When the trunk lid control button
in the glove box is OFF, the trunk
will not open or unlock even when
the button on the transmitter is
pressed.
➃
Panic ( )
The horn sounds and hazard
lamp will flash for about 27 sec-
onds if this button is pressed.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
2GHN3330A
➀
➂
➁
➃
35
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating distance
limit (393.7 inches [10 m]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, con-
tact an authorized Kia Dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er vehicle warranty.
Operational distance may vary
depending upon the area the trans-
mitter is used in. For example, if the
vehicle is parked near police sta-
tions, government and public offices,
broadcasting stations, military instal-
lations, airports, or transmitting tow-
ers, etc.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
Knowing your vehicle
63
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-
tery which will normally last for sev-
eral years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce-
dure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover (
➀
).
2. Replace the battery with new one.
When replacing the battery, make
sure the battery positive “+” sym-
bol faces up as indicated in the
illustration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
The keyless entry system transmit-
ter is designed to give you years of
troublefree use, however it can mal-
function if exposed to moisture or
static electricity. If you are unsure
how to use your transmitter or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
For replacement transmitters, see
an Authorized Kia Dealer for repro-
gramming.
2GHN3101
CAUTION
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to mal-
function. Be sure to use the
correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the trans-
mitter, don't drop it, get it wet,
or expose it to heat or sun-
light.
➀
37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key, and antenna coil in the
key cylinder and BCM (Body Control
Module) in the instrument panel.
With this system, whenever you
insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, the
antenna coil in the ignition switch
receives a signal from the transpon-
der in the ignition key and then sends
the signal to the BCM (Body control
Module).
The BCM checks the signal and
determines whether the ignition key
is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON posi-
tion.
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Knowing your vehicle
83
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each keys separately
not to have any malfunction after
you receive your new vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trou-
ble free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois-
ture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
39
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Driver’s door can be locked and
unlocked with the key.
• Turn the key to the left to lock all
doors.
• Turn the key to the right once to
unlock the driver’s door and to the
right twice within 3 seconds to
unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key.
• Once the doors are unlocked, it
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by the hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
To lock a door without the key, push
the inside door lock button (
➀
) or
door lock switch (
➁
) to the “LOCK”
position and close the door (
➂
).
✽✽
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
DOOR LOCKS
1GHA2011
Lock
Unlock
3
1
2
2GHA2012
Knowing your vehicle
103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
✽✽
NOTICE
If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, pull the door lock
button out to the “UNLOCK” posi-
tion (the red part (
➁
) of the button
becomes visible).
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (
➀
) to the “LOCK” position
(red part (
➁
) of the knob becomes
invisible).
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (
➂
) outward.
• If the inner door handle of driver’s
side door is pulled when the door
lock button is in lock position, the
button is unlocked and door opens
(if equipped).
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and door is open.
1GHA2013
Lock
Unlock
311
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
With central door lock switch
The central door locking switch is
located on the driver’s arm rest. It is
operated by depressing the door lock
switch. If any door is open when the
switch is depressed, the door will
remain locked when closed.
• When pushing down on the front
portion (
➀
) of the driver’s door
lock switch, all vehicle doors will
lock.
• When pushing down on the rear
portion (
➁
) of the switch, all vehicle
doors will unlock.
• However, if the key is in the ignition
switch and any front door is open,
the doors will not lock when the
front portion of central door lock
switch is pressed.
CAUTION
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to pre-
vent accidental opening of the
door. Locked doors will also
discourage potential intruders
when the vehicle stops or
slows.
• Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when some-
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
2GHA2014
Knowing your vehicle
123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rear door child safety lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1GHA2015A
WARNING
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
Furthermore, children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm,
possibly from someone gaining
entry to the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended
in your vehicle.
313
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located
on the rear edge of the door to the
“lock” position. When the child
safety lock is in the “lock ( )”
position, rear door will not open
when the inner door handle is
pulled inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
4. To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (
➀
)
until rear door child safety lock is
unlocked ( ).
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and
be severely injured or killed. To
prevent children from opening
the rear doors from the inside,
the rear door safety locks
should be used whenever chil-
dren are in the vehicle.
Knowing your vehicle
143
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
➀ Driver’s door power window switch
➁ Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
➂ Rear door (left) power window
switch
➃ Rear door (right) power window
switch
➄ Window opening and closing
(see page 3-16)
➅ Automatic power window
(see page 3-16)
➆ Power window lock switch
(see page 3-17)
• Automatic window reversal
(see page 3-16)
• Power window timer
(see page 3-17)
WINDOWS
2GHA2300A
315
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to oper-
ate. Each door has a power window
switch that controls that door’s win-
dow. However, the driver has a power
window lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
If you notice buffeting and pulsation
(wind shock) with either side window
open, you should open the opposite
window slightly to reduce the condi-
tion.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent the power window sys-
tem from the possibility of damage,
do not open or close two windows at
the same time. This will also ensure
the longevity of the fuse.
CAUTION
• Make sure hands and face are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power win-
dow lock switch in the LOCK
position (depressed). Serious
injury can result from uninten-
tional window operation by
the child.
• Do not extend face or arms
outside through the window
opening while driving.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands and other
obstructions are safely out of
the way before closing a win-
dow
Knowing your vehicle
163
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle. To open or
close a window, press down or pull
up the front portion of the correspon-
ding switch.
Automatic power window
Depressing or pulling up the power
window switch momentarily to the
second detent position (
➅
) com-
pletely lowers or lifts the window
even when the switch is released. To
stop the window at the desired posi-
tion while the window is in operation,
pull up or depress the switch
momentarily to the opposite direction
of the window movement.
If the battery has been discharged
or disconnected, the automatic
power window system must be reset
as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON posi-
tion.
2. Close each window and continue
pulling up on each power window
switch for at least 0.5 second after
the window is completely closed.
Automatic window reversal (When
window is closed by the automatic
power window)
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 5.9 inches (150
mm) to allow the object to be
cleared.
1GHA2301A
1GHA2300C
1GHA2300A
317
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Power window lock switch
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on a passenger
door by depressing the power win-
dow lock switch located on the dri-
ver’s door to LOCK (pressed).
• When the power window lock
switch is ON, the driver’s master
control cannot operate the passen-
ger door power windows either.
Power window timer
(if equipped)
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
the ignition key is removed or turn to
the ACC or LOCK position. However,
if the front doors are opened, the
power windows cannot be operated
even within the 30 seconds after the
ignition key removal.
WARNING
• The automatic window rever-
sal feature (window lowers 5.9
inches [150 mm] when a
resistance is detected) will
only operate when the auto-
matic power window up oper-
ation feature is used.
Automatic window reversal
will not operate if the window
is raised using the first detent
position (
➄
) on the power win-
dow switch. Always double
check to make sure all faces,
arms, hands and other
obstructions are safely out of
the way before operating the
power window.
• If an object less than 0.16 inch
(4 mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass
and the upper window chan-
nel, the automatic reversal
may not detect the resistance
and will not operate.
Therefore, always check for
any obstructions before rais-
ing any window.
Knowing your vehicle
183
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driver’s seat
➀
Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward/height (see page 3- 20)
➁
Seatback recliner(see page 3- 22)
➂
Seat heater switch (see page 3- 22)
➃
Lumbar support (see page 3- 23)
➄
Driver position memory system
(see page 3- 24)
■ Headrest adjustment (headrest
can not be adjusted by a switch)
(see page 3- 24)
Front passenger seat
➅
Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward (see page 3- 25)
➆ Seatback recliner (see page 3- 26)
➇Seat heater switch (see page 3- 27)
■ Headrest adjustment (headrest
can not be adjusted by a switch)
(see page 3- 28)
Rear seat
➈
Seat heater switch (left)
(see page 3- 31)
➉ Seat heater switch (right)
(see page 3- 31)
■ Headrest adjustment
(see page 3- 32)
SEAT
ESP
5GHN2025
319
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of
control, and an accident caus-
ing death, serious injury, or
property damage.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in serious or fatal
injury in a sudden stop or col-
lision.
(Continued)
For a seating position more comfort-
able to the driver and front passen-
ger, adjust the seat forward, back-
ward, up and down.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Power seats are driven by the elec-
tric motor. Stop operating if the
adjustment is completed. Excessive
operation may damage the electri-
cal equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seats consume large amounts of
electrical power. To prevent unnec-
essary charging system drain,
don’t adjust the power seats longer
than necessary while the engine is
not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control buttons at the same
time. Doing so may result in power
seat motor or electrical component
malfunction.
WARNING
• Loose objects in the driver’s
foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot ped-
als, possibly causing an acci-
dent. Loose objects might
interfere with the seat slide
mechanism. Do not place any-
thing under the front seats.
• The power seats are operable
with the ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should
never be left unattended in the
car.
Knowing your vehicle
203
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driver’s seat adjustment
Forward/backward position and
height adjustment
Adjusting the seat forward and back-
ward
Push the control button forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the knob
and the seat will lock in the selected
position.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked secure-
ly by trying to move forward and
backward without using the control
knob. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
(Continued)
• Always drive and ride with
your seatback upright and the
lap portion of the safety belt,
or lap belt, snug and low
across the hips. This position
puts your safety belts in the
best position to protect you in
case of an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
air bag injuries including the
possibility of severe injury or
death, always sit as far back
as possible from the steering
wheel so that your chest is
away at least 10 inches (250
mm) away from the steering
wheel.
5GHA2238
321
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Adjusting front height of seat cushion
Move the front portion of the control
knob up to raise or down to lower the
front part of the seat cushion.
Adjusting rear height of seat cushion
Move the rear portion of the control
knob up to raise or down to lower the
rear part of the seat cushion.
Adjusting the height of seat cushion
To raise or lower the seat cushion,
pull up or push down on the center of
the corresponding switch. Release
the knob once the seat reaches to
the desired position.
5GHA2239
5GHA2240
5GHA2241
Knowing your vehicle
223
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjusting the driver’s seatback
recliner
Move the lever forward or backward
to the desired angle and release the
lever. If the lever is released, seat-
back will lock in place. After adjust-
ment, make sure that the lever has
returned to its original locked posi-
tion.
Warming the driver’s seats
(if equipped)
The front seats can be electrically
heated individually when the ignition
switch is ON. When the switch is ON,
a number ranging from 1 to 5 is dis-
played on the switch (5 = warmest
setting).
To turn off the seat warmer, set the
switch to 0.
The seat warmer turns off automati-
cally when the seat temperature
reaches the selected range and will
turn on again if the temperature
drops below the selected range.
5GHA2242
WARNING
Driving or riding in a vehicle
with a front seatback reclined
could lead to serious or fatal
injury in an accident. If a front
seat is reclined during an acci-
dent, the occupant’s hips may
slide under the lap portion of
the safety belt applying great
force to the unprotected
abdomen or neck. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could
result. Keep the seatbacks in a
comfortably upright position
whenever the vehicle is in
motion.
TCS
2GHA2051A
323
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats while the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
Lumbar support
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the drivers seat.
Press the front portion of the switch
(
➀
) to increase support, or the rear
portion of the switch (
➁
), to decrease
support.
WARNING
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warm-
ers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. In par-
ticular, the following types of
passengers should exercise
extreme care:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
handicapped persons, or hos-
pital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
1GHA2244
➀
➁
Knowing your vehicle
243
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driver position memory system
(if equipped)
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the seat
and outside mirror positions with a
simple button operation. By saving
the desired positions into the system
memory, different drivers can reposi-
tion the seat and outside mirror
based upon their driving preference.
See page 3-34 for detail information.
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting forward and backward
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to three different positions by
pulling the headrest forward. To
adjust the headrest backward, pull it
fully forward to the farthest position
and release it. Adjust the headrest so
that it properly supports the head
and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and passengers,
but also helps to protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
➀
). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (
➁
) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (
➂
). For best protection,
adjust the headrest so its center is as
high as your ears. Also adjust the
headrest so its distance from the
head is as wide as your fist.
5GHA2243
1GHA2245
1GHA2246
325
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release lever (
➀
) while pulling
upward (
➁
).
Adjusting the front passenger
seat
Forward/backward position
adjustment
Push the control knob forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the knob
and the seat will lock in the selected
position.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked secure-
ly by trying to move forward and
backward without using the control
knob. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
1GHA2247
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and
neck injuries, do not drive the
vehicle with the headrest
removed or improperly posi-
tioned.
Do not adjust the driver’s head-
rest while driving.
5GHA2248
Knowing your vehicle
263
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Adjusting seatback recliner
Move the lever forward or backward
to the desired angle and release the
lever. If the lever is released, seat-
back will lock in place. After adjust-
ment, make sure that the lever has
returned to its original locked posi-
tion.
WARNING
In order to avoid unnecessary
air bag injuries including the
possibility of severe injury or
death, always sit as far back as
possible by moving the seat far
back, while still maintaining
good vehicle control. Serious
injury or death may be caused
due to the deployment of the
passenger’s air bag.
WARNING
Riding in a vehicle with a front
seatback reclined could lead to
serious or fatal injury in an acci-
dent. If a front seat is reclined,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the
safety belt applying great force
to the unprotected abdomen or
neck. Serious or fatal internal
injuries could result. Keep the
seatbacks in a comfortably
upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
5GHA2249
327
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Warming the front passenger
seats (if equipped)
The front seats can be electrically
heated individually when the ignition
switch is ON. When the switch is ON,
a number ranging from 1 to 5 is dis-
played on the switch (5 = warmest
setting).
To turn off the seat warmer, set the
switch to 0.
The seat warmer turns off automati-
cally when the seat temperature
reaches the selected range and will
turn on again if the temperature
drops below the selected range.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats while the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
1GHA2051A
Knowing your vehicle
283
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting forward and backward
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to three different positions by
pulling the headrest forward. To
adjust the headrest backward, pull it
fully forward to the farthest position
and release it. Adjust the headrest so
that it properly supports the head
and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and passengers,
but also helps to protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
➀
). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (
➁
) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (
➂
). For best protection,
adjust the headrest so its center is as
high as your ears. Also adjust the
headrest so its distance from the
head is as wide as your fist.
1GHA2245
WARNING
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warm-
ers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. In par-
ticular, the following types of
passengers should exercise
extreme care:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
handicapped persons, or hos-
pital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
1GHA2246
329
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (
➀
) while pulling
upward (
➁
).
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and
neck injuries, do not drive the
vehicle with the headrest
removed or improperly posi-
tioned.
1GHA2247
Knowing your vehicle
303
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rear seat
Full flat seat
To allow the rear seat passenger to
support their legs while the front pas-
senger seat is in a reclined position,
the front passenger seatback can be
reclined nearly flat.
1. Remove the headrest (refer to
page 3-29).
2. Using the control switch, move the
front passenger seat to the far-
thest forward position.
3. Using the control switch, recline
the seatback as far as it can go to
allow the rear seat passenger to
support their legs in the reclined
position.
Armrest
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down from the seatback.
You will find a storage cover and cup
holders (if equipped).
2GHN2237A
1GHA2252
WARNING
Do not allow a rear seat passen-
ger to use the full flat seat fea-
ture and recline while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Severe injury
or death could occur.
331
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Warming the rear passenger
seats (if equipped)
Rear seats can be electrically heated
when the ignition switch is ON.
1. Pull the armrest down using the
strap provided on the armrest.
2. When the switch is ON, a number
ranging from 1 to 5 is displayed on
the switch (5 = warmest setting).
To turn off the seat warmer, set the
switch to 0.
The seat warmer turns off automati-
cally when the seat temperature
reaches the selected range and will
turn on again if the temperature
drops below the selected range.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats while the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warm-
ers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. In par-
ticular, the following types of
passengers should exercise
extreme care:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
handicapped persons, or hos-
pital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
2GHN3320
left rear seat
right rear seat
Knowing your vehicle
323
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting forward and backward
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to three different positions by
pulling the headrest forward. To
adjust the headrest backward, pull it
fully forward to the farthest position
and release it. Adjust the headrest so
that it properly supports the head
and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and passengers,
but also helps to protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
➀
). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (
➁
) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (
➂
). For best protection,
adjust the headrest so its center is as
high as your ears. Also adjust the
headrest so its distance from the
head is as wide as your fist.
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release lever (
➀
) while pulling
upward (
➁
).
1GHA2254
1GHA2255
1GHA2253
333
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Storing long/narrow cargo with
trunk closed (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down using the
strap provided on the armrest. Pull
the cover down while pushing the
release lever down. Additional cargo
space is provided to accommodate
long/narrow cargo (skis, poles, lum-
ber, etc.) not able to fit properly in the
trunk when closed.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and
neck injuries, do not drive the
vehicle with the headrest
removed or improperly posi-
tioned.
1GHA2108
CAUTION
• Make sure the engine is off,
the transaxle is in P and the
parking brake is applied
whenever loading or unload-
ing cargo.Vehicle may move if
shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
• Be careful when loading cargo
through the rear passenger
seats to prevent damage to
the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
Unsecured cargo in the pas-
senger compartment can
cause damage to the vehicle
or injury to its occupants.
Knowing your vehicle
343
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the seat
and outside mirror positions with a
simple button operation. By saving
the desired positions into the system
memory, different drivers can reposi-
tion the seat and outside mirror
based upon their driving preference.
If battery is disconnected, the posi-
tion memory will be lost and the driv-
ing positions should be restored in
the system.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the transaxle lever into P
while the ignition switch is ON.
2. Adjust the seat and outside
rearview mirror to positions com-
fortable for the driver.
3. Press M button on the control
panel.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the M button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
The particular driver positions are
memorized in the button (1 or 2)
selected.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
5GHA2201
335
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the transaxle lever into P
while the ignition switch is ON.
2. To recall the position in memory,
press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) the system will beep once,
then seat and outside rearview
mirror will automatically adjust to
the stored positions.
Adjusting one of the control knobs for
the seat or outside rearview mirror
while the system is recalling the
stored positions will cause the move-
ment for that component to stop and
move in the direction that the control
knob is moved. Other components
will continue position recalling.
To stop the position recall at any
point in the recall process, press the
STOP button once. Seat and outside
rearview mirror position recalling will
stop.
Storing and recalling with
transmitter
Storing with the transmitter
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK from
ON and lock all the doors using the
transmitter. The seat and outside
rearview mirror positions will be
stored in the system memory.
Driver’s position recalling with
transmitter
Unlock the door with the transmitter,
positions stored in the system mem-
ory will be recalled automatically.
If using two transmitters, recalling
times may vary because stored posi-
tions in each transmitter may be dif-
ferent.
Example) If doors are locked with
transmitter A and unlocked with
transmitter B, the positions memo-
rized when unlocked with transmitter
B will be recalled and may take
slightly longer than if unlocked with
transmitter A.
CAUTION
Use caution when recalling
adjustment memory while sit-
ting in the vehicle. Press the
STOP button immediately if the
seat moves too far in any direc-
tion.
Knowing your vehicle
363
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver’s
and front passenger’s pre-tensioner
seat belts. The purpose of the pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
seat belts fit tightly against the occu-
pant’s body in certain frontal colli-
sions. The pre-tensioner seat belts
can be activated alone or, together
with the air bags, where the frontal
collision is severe enough.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration.
➀
SRS air bag warning light
➁
Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly
➂
SRS air bag control module
SAFETY BELTS
2GHB3002
CAUTION
The pre-tensioner seat belt is
installed at the front seats, and
the sensor is equipped inside
the buckle, where presence of
passenger is sensed by the fas-
tening of the seat belts.
Therefore, pre-tensioner will not
activate if the passenger is not
fastened with the seat belts.
Likewise, it will activate if buck-
led even without a passenger in
the seat. Pre-tensioner seat belt
is designed to activate when the
seatbelt is in use. To ensure the
pretensioner seatbelts activate
in event of a possible seatbelt
buckle switch malfunction, the
system is designed to activate
regardless of whether a seat
belt is in use or if no seat belt
use is detected within 6 sec-
onds of turning the ignition
switch ON.
2GHB3001
➀
➁
➂
337
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Load limiter
When the pre-tentioner activates, if
the system senses excessive seat
belt tension on the driver or passen-
ger’s seat belt, the load limiter inside
the pre-tensioner will release some
of the pressure on the affected seat
belt.
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from
a pre-tensioner seat belt:
• The seat belt must be worn
correctly.
• The seat belt must be adjusted
to the correct position.
CAUTION
When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment and are not toxic.
Although, it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods. Wash your
hands and face thoroughly after
an accident in which the air
bags and/or pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated.
Knowing your vehicle
383
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
• Improper handling of the pre-
tensioner seat belt assem-
blies, and failure to heed the
warnings not to strike, modify,
inspect, place, service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inad-
vertent activation causing
serious injury.
Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a
motor vehicle.
CAUTION
• Because the sensor that acti-
vates the SRS air bag is con-
nected with pre-tensioner seat
belt, the SRS air bag warning
light on the instrument panel
will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after
the ignition key has been
turned to the “ON” position,
then the light should go off.
• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is
not working properly, this
warning light will illuminate
even if there is no malfunction
of SRS air bag system. If the
SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to “ON” ,
or if it remains illuminated
after blinking or illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds,
or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, please
have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belt or SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed
to operate once. After activa-
tion, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat
belts, of any type, should
always be replaced after they
have been worn during a colli-
sion.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assembly for several min-
utes after they have been acti-
vated.
339
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Safety belt restraint system
We strongly recommend that the
driver and all passengers be proper-
ly restrained at all times by using the
safety belts provided with the vehi-
cle. Proper use of the safety belts
decreases the risk of severe injury or
death in accidents or sudden stops.
In most states, and in Canada, the
law requires their use.
All seats have lap/shoulder belts.
Inertial locks in the safety belt retrac-
tors allow all of the lap/shoulder safe-
ty belts to remain unlocked during
normal vehicle operation. This allows
the occupants some freedom of
movement and increased comfort
while using the safety belts. If a force
is applied to the vehicle, such as a
strong stop, a sharp turn, or a colli-
sion, the safety belt retractors will
automatically lock the safety belts.
Since the inertial locks do not require
a collision in order to lock up, you
may become aware of the safety
belts locking while braking or going
around sharp corners.
Always use the rear seat position(s)
to install your child restraint(s).
Never install a child restraint system
in the front passenger position, as an
inflating air bag could cause serious
or fatal injury to a child in that posi-
tion.
WARNING - Safety belts
To minimize the risk of serious
or fatal injury in an accident, the
driver and all passengers
should use the appropriate
safety restraints for their age
and size. The presence of air
bags does not change the need
to be properly restrained by a
safety belt or size-appropriate
child restraint. In fact, air bags
are designed to work the best
when passengers are correctly
restrained in the vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with the
information in this section,
including the information on
infant and child restraints. Read
the safety warnings on the sun
visors of your vehicle also.
Knowing your vehicle
403
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The rear safety belts use a special
auto-lock feature designed to allow a
child restraint to be used in these
positions without an added locking
clip. They normally lock only under
extreme or emergency conditions
(emergency lock mode). However
they can be adjusted so that they
remain in fixed and locked when a
child restraint system is placed in
these positions. (Use this auto-lock
mode only to secure a child restraint,
never for passengers restrained by
the safety belts.) Page 3-53 gives
instructions on placing the safety belt
in the auto lock mode.
The drivers safety belt can only oper-
ate in the emergency lock mode.
Safety belts provide the best restraint
when:
• The seatback is upright.
• The occupant is sitting upright (not
slouched).
• The lap belt is snug across the hips.
• The shoulder belt is snug across
the chest.
• The knees are straight forward.
To help you remember to fasten your
safety belt, a warning light will come
on and a chime will sound. See
Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
on page 3-42.
WARNING - After a colli-
sion
• Lap/shoulder belt assemblies
may be stretched or damaged
when subjected to the stress
and forces of a collision.
• The entire restraint system
should be inspected following
any collision. All belts, retrac-
tors, anchors and hardware
damaged by a collision should
be replaced before the vehicle
is operated again.
341
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Cargo area
(if equipped)
Passengers should never be
allowed to ride in the cargo area
of a vehicle. No safety belts are
provided for the cargo area.
Persons riding in the vehicle
without a fastened safety belt
are much more likely to suffer
serious bodily injury or death
during an accident.
WARNING - Twisted belts
A twisted or jammed safety belt
cannot restrain you properly. If
you cannot untwist or unjam the
safety belt, have an authorized
Kia dealer it immediately. Never
drive or ride with a twisted or
jammed safety belt.
WARNING - Belt use
Safety belts must be used cor-
rectly to work properly in an
accident. Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly that
includes a buckle and tongue
designed to be used together.
For greatest effectiveness, fol-
low these guidelines in using
safety belts:
• Use the shoulder portion of
the safety belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder portion under the
arm.
• Never swing the safety belt
around your neck to fit over
the inside shoulder.
• Never wear the shoulder por-
tion of the safety belt across
the neck or face.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wear the lap portion as low as
possible. Be sure that the lap
belt fits snugly around the
hips. Never wear a lap portion
of a lap/shoulder belt over
your waist; it should always
go over the stronger area of
your hips.
• Never use a single safety belt
for more than one person.
• The front seatbacks should
always remain in a comfort-
able, upright position when
the vehicle is moving.
Knowing your vehicle
423
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING - Safety belt
care
• A damaged belt may not give
you the protection you need in
an accident.
• Inspect your safety belts peri-
odically for excessive wear or
damage. Pull out each belt
fully and look for fraying, cuts,
burns or other damage. Pull
the safety belt out and let it
retract a number of times.
Make sure that the lap/shoul-
der belts return smoothly and
easily into the retractor.
• Check the latches to make
sure they latch and release
without interference or delay.
• Never close the doors on any
part of the lap or shoulder
belt.
• Any belt not in good condition
or in good working order
should be promptly replaced.
CAUTION
Never close the doors on any
part of the lap or shoulder belt.
It can damage the safety belt or
buckle which could increase the
risk of injury in case of an acci-
dent.
Safety belt warning light and
chime
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not
fastened when the key is turned ON
or if it is unfastened after the key is
turned ON, safety belt warning light
blinks until the belt is fastened.
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not
fastened when the key is turned ON
or if it is unfastened after the key is
turned ON, safety belt warning chime
sounds for approximately 6 seconds.
1GQA2083
343
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten the front lap/shoulder
belt:
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue
plate.
2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt
out from the retractor.
3. Insert the tongue plate (
➀
) into the
open end of the buckle (
➁
) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating
the belt is locked in the buckle.
4. Position the lap portion (
➀
) of the
belt across your lap as LOW ON
THE HIPS as possible to reduce
the risk of sliding under it during
an accident. Adjust the belt to a
SNUG FIT by pulling up on the
shoulder portion (
➁
) of the safety
belt. The belt retractor is designed
to take up excess webbing auto-
matically and to maintain tension
on the belt. For your safety, do not
put any excess slack into the safe-
ty belt at any location.
1GHA2262 1GHA2263 1GHA2264
Knowing your vehicle
443
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
• The seatbacks should always
remain in a comfortable,
upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. The safe-
ty belt system will provide the
most protection with the seat-
backs in an upright position.
• Never wear the shoulder por-
tion of the safety belt under
the outside arm or behind the
back.
• Never wear the shoulder por-
tion of the safety belt across
the neck or face.
• Wear the lap portion of the
safety belt as low on the hips
as possible. Be sure the lap
belt fits snugly around the
hips. Never wear the lap belt
over your waist.
(Continued)
5. Adjust the shoulder anchor posi-
tion to your size. To raise the
anchor position, push the anchor
up (
➀
). To lower the anchor posi-
tion, press the button (
➁
) and slide
the anchor down (
➂
). After adjust-
ment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.
To unfasten the front lap/shoulder
belt:
Press the release button on the
buckle and allow the belt to slowly
retract.
MMSA3026
MMSA3025
5GHN3900
Type A
Type B
➀
➀
➁
➁
➁
➂
➂
345
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Rear lap/shoulder belt
To fasten the rear lap/shoulder
belt:
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue
plate.
2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt
out.
3. Insert the tongue plate (
➀
) into the
open end of the buckle (
➁
) until an
audible “click’’ is heard, indicating
the belt is locked in the buckle.
4. Position the lap portion (
➀
) of the
belt across your lap as LOW ON
THE HIPS as possible to reduce
the risk of sliding under it during
an accident. Adjust the belt to a
SNUG FIT by pulling up on the
shoulder portion (
➁
) of the safety
belt. The belt retractor is designed
to take up excess webbing auto-
matically and to maintain tension
on the belt. For your safety do not
put any excess slack into the safe-
ty belt.
(Continued)
• Never drive or ride with a
twisted or jammed safety belt.
If you cannot untwist or unjam
the safety belt, see the nearest
Kia dealer immediately.
• Never use a single belt to
restrain more than one person
at a time.
Failure to follow these warnings
will increase the risk and sever-
ity of injury in an accident.
1GHA2263
1GHA2264
Knowing your vehicle
463
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To unfasten:
Press the release button on the
buckle and allow the belt to slowly
retract.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
WARNING
• Never wear the shoulder por-
tion of the safety belt under
the outside arm or behind the
back.
• Never wear the shoulder por-
tion of the safety belt across
the neck or face.
• Wear the lap portion of the
safety belt as low as possible.
Be sure the lap belt fits snug-
ly around the hips. Never wear
the lap belt over your waist.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never drive or ride with a
twisted or jammed safety belt.
If you cannot untwist or unjam
the safety belt, see the nearest
Kia dealer immediately.
• Never use a single belt to
restrain more than one person
at a time.
Failure to follow these warnings
will increase the risk and sever-
ity of injury in an accident.
2GHA2122A
347
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Proper use and care of the
safety belt system
To ensure that the safety belts pro-
vide the maximum protection, please
follow these instructions:
• Use the belts at all times - even on
short trips.
• If the safety belt is twisted, straight-
en it prior to use.
• Keep sharp edges and damaging
objects away from the belts.
• Periodically inspect belt webbing,
anchors, buckles and all other
parts for signs of wear and dam-
age. Replace damaged, excessive-
ly worn or questionable parts
immediately.
• To clean the belt webbing, use a
mild soap solution recommended
for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
Follow the instructions provided
with the soap.
Do not bleach or dye the webbing
because this may weaken the web-
bing fibers and allow them to fail
when loaded in a collision.
• Do not make modifications or addi-
tions to the safety belt.
• After wearing a safety belt, make
sure it fully retracts to the stowed
position. Do not allow the belt to
get caught in the door when you
close it.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the safe-
ty belt over the area of the
abdomen where the fetus is
located or above the abdomen
where the belt could crush the
fetus during an impact.
Knowing your vehicle
483
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Restraint of infants and small
children
To increase their safety, infants and
young children should always be
restrained by a restraint system
approved for their age and size.
Never allow a child to stand or kneel
on the seat of a moving vehicle.
Never allow a safety belt to be placed
around both a child and an adult or
around two children at the same
time.
It is best for children to be seated in
the rear seats.
Many companies manufacture child
restraint systems (often called child
seats) for infants and small children.
An acceptable child restraint system
must always satisfy U.S. Federal
Motor Vehicle Sefety Standards.
Make sure that any child-restraint
system you use in your vehicle is
labelled as complying with those
safety standards.
The child-restraint system should be
chosen to fit both the size of the child
and the size of the vehicle seat. Be
sure to follow any instructions provid-
ed by the child-restraint system man-
ufacturer when installing the child-
restraint system.
WARNING - Children on
laps
Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms in a moving vehi-
cle.
Even a very strong person can-
not hold onto a child in the
event of even a minor collision.
WARNING - Infants and
young children
• Infants and young children are
at much greater risk of serious
injury or death in an accident
or sudden stop if they are unre-
strained or restrained improp-
erly. Follow all instructions in
this section of your Kia manual
and the instructions that came
on and with an improved child
safety restraint system. The
child restraint must be correct-
ly installed in the vehicle, and
the child must be correctly
installed in the child restraint.
• All children under 12 are
safest in the back seat.
• Never install a child or infant
seat in the front passenger
position. The baby will be
injured or killed by the air bag
if it deploys in an accident.
•
Never allow a child to stand or
kneel on the seat of a moving
vehicle. Insist the child sit down
in an approved restraint system.
349
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Restraint of larger children
As children grow, they may need to
use new child-restraint systems,
including larger child seats or boost-
er seats, which are appropriate for
their increased size.
A child who has outgrown available
child-restraint systems should use
the belts provided in the vehicle.
When seated in the rear outboard
seats, the child should be restrained
by the lap/shoulder belt.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they may
need to be returned to a child
restraint system. In addition, after-
market devices are available from
independent manufacturers which
help pull the shoulder belt down and
away from the child’s face or neck.
Larger children should use one of
the seat belts provided.
WARNING - Shoulder
belts on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to
be in contact with a child’s
neck or face while the vehicle
is in motion.
• If safety belts are not properly
worn and adjusted, there is a
risk of death or serious injury
to such a child.
CAUTION - Hot metal
parts
Safety belts and seats can
become hot in a vehicle that has
been closed during warm/hot
weather; they could burn a
child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
Knowing your vehicle
503
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Child restraint system
(if equipped)
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required by law. This child seat or
infant seat should be of appropriate
size for the child and should be
installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions. It is strongly
recommended that the seat be
placed in the vehicle's rear seat
since this can make an important
contribution to safety.
Children riding in the car should sit
on the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
You are required by law to use safe-
ty restraints for children. If small chil-
dren ride in your vehicle you must
put them in a child restraint system
(safety seat).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car and seat belts,
and fits your child. Follow all the
instructions provided by the manu-
facturer when installing the child
restraint system.
ADAIRBAG
WARNING
• A child restraint system must
be placed in the rear seat.
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat.
Should an accident occur and
cause the passenger air bag
to deploy, it could severely
injure or kill an infant or child
seated in an infant or child
seat. Thus, only use a child
restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
(Continued)
351
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• Since a safety belt or child
restraint system can become
very hot if it is left in a closed
vehicle, be sure to check the
seat cover and buckles before
placing a child there.
• When the child restraint sys-
tem is not in use, store it in the
trunk or fasten it with a safety
belt so that it will not be
thrown forward in the case of
a sudden stop or an accident.
• Children who are too large to
be in a child restraint should
sit in the rear seat and be
restrained with the available
lap/shoulder belts. Never
allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always make sure that the
shoulder belt portion of the
lap/shoulder belt is positioned
midway over the shoulder,
never across the neck or
behind the back. The lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder
belt must always be posi-
tioned as low as possible on
the child's hips and as snug
as possible.
• If the seat belt will not proper-
ly fit the child the use of an
approved booster seat in the
rear seat must be used in
order to raise the child's seat-
ing height so that the seat belt
will properly fit the child.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never allow a child to stand up
or kneel on the seat.
• Never use an infant carrier or
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback; it may not
provide adequate security in
an accident.
• Never allow a child to be held
in a person's arms while they
are in a moving vehicle, as
this could result in serious
injury to the child in the event
of an accident or a sudden
stop. Holding a child in a mov-
ing vehicle does not provide
the child with any means of
protection during an accident,
even if the person holding the
child is wearing a seat belt.
Knowing your vehicle
523
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats. Never place
a rear-facing child restraint in the
front passenger seat, because of
the danger that an inflating pas-
senger side air bag could impact
the rear-facing child restraint and
kill the child.
Since all passenger’s (except dri-
ver’s) safety belts move freely under
normal conditions and only lock
under extreme or emergency condi-
tions (emergency lock mode), you
must manually change these safety
belts to the auto lock mode to secure
a child restraint.
✽✽
NOTICE
The driver’s safety belt incorporates
the emergency lock mode only.
WARNING
• Do not install any child
restraint system in the front
passenger seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger air bag to deploy, it
could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an
infant or child seat. Therefore,
only use a child restraint sys-
tem in the rear seat of your
vehicle.
• If the child restraint seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of
a child being seriously injured
or killed in a collision greatly
increases.
WARNING
• Before installing the child
restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the
child restraint system manu-
facturer.
• If the seat belt does not oper-
ate as described, have the
system checked immediately
by your authorized Kia dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an acci-
dent.
353
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Placing a passenger safety
belt into the auto lock mode
The use of the auto lock mode will
ensure that the normal movement of
the child in the vehicle does not
cause the safety belt to be pulled out
and loosen the firmness of its hold
on the child restraint system. To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the safety belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an
emergency.
E2MS103005 E2BLD310
Knowing your vehicle
543
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
safety belt all the way out. When
the shoulder portion of the safety
belt is fully extended, it will shift
the retractor to the “Auto Lock”
(child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the safety belt to retract and lis-
ten for an audible “clicking” or
“ratcheting” sound. This indicates
that the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the safety
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the safety belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
MMSA3028
"Click"
MMSA3029 MMSA3030
355
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the safe-
ty belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the safety belt
to retract fully.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the safety belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Auto Lock” mode
to the emergency lock mode for nor-
mal adult usage.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automati-
cally returns to the “emergency
lock mode” whenever the belt is
allowed to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each
time a child restraint is
installed.
If the safety belt is not placed in
the “auto lock” mode, severe
injury or death could occur to
the child and/or other occupants
in the vehicle in a collision,
since the child restraint will not
be effectively held in place.
Knowing your vehicle
563
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Securing a child restraint seat
with “Tether Anchor” system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the shelf behind the rear
seats.
1. Open the tether anchor cover on
the shelf behind the rear seats.
2. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rest, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to
the correct child restraint hook
holder and tighten to secure the
seat.
2GHN33002GHA2025
WARNING
If the tether strap is secured
incorrectly, the child restraint
seat may not be restrained
properly in the event of a colli-
sion.
357
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Child seat lower anchors
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as International Standards
Organization Fixed (ISOFIX) or
ISOFIX-compatible child restraint
seats. These seats include two rigid
or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two ISOFIX anchors
at specific seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of child restraint
seat eliminates the need to use seat
belts to attach the child seat for for-
ward-facing child restraint seats in
the rear seats.
2GHN2025A
WARNING - Child
restraint
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or come away causing death or
injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached some-
where other than the correct
tether anchor.
Knowing your vehicle
583
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ISOFIX anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustra-
tion. There is no ISOFIX anchor pro-
vided for the center rear seating
position.
The ISOFIX anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with ISOFIX or
ISOFIX-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the ISOFIX
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the ISOFIX and
tether anchors. Also, test the child
restraint seat before you place the
child in it. Tilt the seat from side to
side. Also try to tug the seat forward.
Check to see if the anchors hold the
seat in place.
WARNING
If the child restraint is not
anchored properly, the risk of a
child being seriously injured or
killed in a collision greatly
increases.
2GHA2127/SBGQ03102
359
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a single teth-
er or to a child restraint lower
anchorage point. The improp-
er increased load may cause
the anchorage points or tether
anchor to break, causing seri-
ous injury or death.
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the rear center seating
position using the vehicle’s
ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX
anchors are only provided for
the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Do not mis-
use the ISOFIX anchors by
attempting to attach a child
restraint seat in the middle
rear seating position to the
ISOFIX anchors.
(Continued)
(Continued)
In a crash, the child restraint
seat ISOFIX attachments may
not be strong enough to
secure the child restraint seat
improperly in the rear center
seating position and may
break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-
compatible child restraint seat
only to the appropriate loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation
and use instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the
child restraint.
10
Knowing your vehicle
603
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
COAST
SET
RES
ACCEL
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANC
EL
C
O
O
A
ST
ST
T
C
O
A
C
O
T
SE
T
E
T
T
SE
S
RES
ACCEL
ACCEL
ACCEL
CCEL
➀
Driver’s air bag
➁
Front passenger’s
air bag
➃
Curtain Air bag
➄
Front impact
sensor
➆
SRS control module
➅
Side impact sensor
1GHA2123/2GHA2256/1GHA2257/1GHA2126/1GHA2128/1GHA2127/2GHA0005A/1GHA2124/2GHA2125/1LDN2167/1LDN2168/5GHN3001
➂
Side air bag
➈
Occupant classi-
fication system
➇
Front seat position
sensor
➇
➈
361
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
➀
Driver’s air bag
(see page 3- 65)
➁
Front passenger’s air bag
(see page 3- 66)
➂
Side air bag
(see page 3- 72)
➃
Curtain Air bag
(see page 3- 73)
➄ Front impact sensor
(see page 3- 74)
➅
Side impact sensor
(see page 3- 74)
➆
SRS Control Module
(see page 3- 74)
➇
Front seat position sensor
➈
Occupant classification system
(see page 3- 66)
■ Air bag inflation condition
(see page 3- 75)
■ Air bag non-inflation condition
(see page 3- 76)
■ Air bag warning light
(see page 3- 81)
■ Air bag service
(see page 3- 82)
■ Air bag warning label
(see page 3- 83)
What your air bag system
does
Driver’s air bag and front passen-
ger’s air bag are designed to supple-
ment the protection offered by the
safety belt in certain frontal colli-
sions. Likewise, side air bag and cur-
tain air bags are designed to supple-
ment the protection offered by the
safety belt in side collisions. Safety
belts are designed to reduce the
injury of the driver or passengers in
case of impact or collision. No safety
belt or air bag system can complete-
ly eliminate injuries that may cause
in collisions or impacts. To help
reduce impact on driver or passen-
gers in any collision, safety belts
must be correctly worn.
What your air bag system
does not do
The air bag system is designed to
supplement the protection offered by
the safety belt system. IT IS NOT A
SUBSTITUTE FOR THE SAFETY
BELT.
Knowing your vehicle
623
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The importance of using
safety belts
There are four very important rea-
sons to use safety belts even with an
air bag supplemental restraint sys-
tem. They:
• help keep you in the proper posi-
tion (away from the air bag) when it
inflates.
• reduce the risk of harm in rollover,
side impact (vehicles not equipped
with side and curtain air bags) or
rear impact collisions, because an
air bag is not designed to inflate in
such situations and even a side
curtain air bag is designed to
inflate only in certain side impact
collisions.
• reduce the risk of harm in frontal or
side collisions which are not
severe enough to actuate the air
bag supplemental restraint system.
• reduce the risk of being ejected
from your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
Your vehicle’s Supplemental
Restraint System Control Module is
equipped with a recording device
that may record the use or status of
the safety belt restraint system by
the driver and front passenger in
certain collisions.
WARNING
- Air bags &
safety belts
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers
must always wear the safety
belts provided in order to min-
imize the risk and severity of
injury in the event of a colli-
sion or rollover.
• Always wear your safety belt.
It can help keep you away
from the air bags during heavy
braking just before a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If occupants are not wearing
safety belts or correctly seat-
ed, they cannot be protected,
and thus face serious injury or
death.
• Driver’s and front passenger’s
air bag are designed to inflate
only in certain frontal colli-
sion, and side and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate in
certain side impacts. Frontal
air bags will generally not pro-
vide protection in side
impacts (vehicles not
equipped with side and cur-
tain air bags) or rear impacts,
rollovers, less severe frontal
collisions. They will not pro-
vide protection from later
impacts in a multi-impact col-
lision.
(Continued)
363
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag system components
The main components of your SRS
are:
• To indicate that your vehicle is
equipped with air bags, the corre-
sponding air bag covers are
marked with “SRS AIR BAG”.
- Driver’s air bag (see page 3- 65)
- Passenger’s air bag (see page 3-
66)
- Side air bag (see page 3- 72)
- Curtain air bag (see page 3- 73)
• A diagnostic system that continual-
ly monitors the system operation.
• An indicator light to warn you of a
possible problem with the system.
• Emergency power backup in case
your car’s electrical system is dis-
connected in a crash.
The SRS uses a collection of sen-
sors to gather information about the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat
position, the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s safety belt usage and
impact severity.
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seat position sensors, which are
installed on the seat track, determine
if the seats are fore or aft of a refer-
ence position. Similarly, the safety
belt usage sensors determine if the
driver and front passenger’s safety
belts are fastened. These sensors
provide the ability to control the SRS
deployment based on how close the
driver’s seat is to the steering wheel,
how close the passenger’s seat is to
the instrument panel, whether or not
the safety belts are fastened, and the
severity of the impact.
(Continued)
• If your vehicle has been sub-
jected to flood conditions (e.g.
soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehi-
cle, etc.) or if your vehicle has
become flood damaged in any
way, do not attempt to start
the vehicle or put the key in
the ignition before discon-
necting the battery.
Disregarding this precaution
may cause air bag deploy-
ment, which could result in
serious personal injury or
death. If your vehicle is sub-
jected to flooded conditions,
before starting the vehicle,
have the vehicle towed to an
authorized Kia dealer for
inspection and necessary
repairs.
Knowing your vehicle
643
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity,
seating position and safety belt
usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control
Module) controls the air bag inflation.
Failure to properly wear safety
belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your SRS is equipped
with an occupant classification sys-
tem in the front passenger’s seat.
The occupant classification system
detects the presence of a passenger
in the front passenger’s seat and will
turn off the front passenger’s air bag
under certain conditions. For more
detail, see “Occupant Classification
System” later in this section.
CAUTION
If the seat position sensor is not
working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light ( ) on the
instrument panel will illuminate
even if there is no malfunction
of the SRS air bag system,
because the SRS air bag warn-
ing light is connected with the
seat position sensor. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, if
it remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 6
seconds, or if it illuminates
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, have an authorized Kia deal-
er inspect the seat position sen-
sor and the advanced SRS air
bag system as soon as possi-
ble.
AIR
BAG
WARNING
• Modification to the seat struc-
ture can adversely affect the
seat position sensor and
cause the air bag to deploy at
a different level than should
be provided.
• Failure to properly wear safety
belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury by causing
the air bags to deploy at a dif-
ferent level than should be
provided.
• Do not place any objects
underneath the front seats
which could damage the seat
position sensor or interfere
with the occupant classifica-
tion system.
• Do not place any objects that
may cause magnetic fields
near the front seat.These may
cause a malfunction of the
seat position sensor.
(Continued)
365
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Driver’s air bag
The driver’s air bag is stored in the
center of the steering wheel.
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CAN
C
E
L
COAST
SET
RES
ACCEL
HLZ206
2GHA2256
(Continued)
• Ignoring the SRS indicator
light (air bag indicator and
passenger air bag off indica-
tor) can result in serious or
fatal injury if the air bags
occupant classification sys-
tem or pretensioners do not
work properly. Have your car
checked by a dealer as soon
as possible if the SRS warning
light alerts you to a potential
problem.
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
or fatal injury in a crash. All
occupants should sit upright
in their seats with their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
WARNING
• You must always sit as far
back from the steering wheel
air bag as possible (chest at
least 10 inches (250 mm) away
from the steering wheel), while
still maintaining a comfortable
seating position for good
vehicle control, in order to
reduce the risk of injury or
death in a collision.
• Never place objects over the
air bag storage compartments
or between the air bags and
yourself. Due to the speed and
force of the air bag inflation,
such objects could hit your
body at high speed and cause
severe bodily injury and even
death.
• Do not put stickers or orna-
ments on the steering wheel
cover. These may interfere
with the deployment of the air
bag.
Knowing your vehicle
663
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Front passenger’s air bag
Front passenger’s air bag is stored
in the instrument panel on the glove
box.
Since you cannot know which air
bags will deploy or from what direc-
tion, never put any objects or orna-
ments on the instrument panel.
Occupant classification system
The occupant classification system
detects the presence of a passenger
in the front passenger's seat and will
turn off the front passenger's air bag
under certain conditions.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and deter-
mine if the front passenger's air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or
not.
Only the front passenger front air bag
and front passenger side air bag are
controlled by the Occupant
Classification System.
Main components of occupant
classification system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag sys-
tems (both front and side) should
be activated or deactivated.
• A warning light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" passenger air bag system is
deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant classification system.
5GHN3001
1GHA2257
HLZ208
367
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
If there is no passenger in the front
passenger seat or if the passenger in
the front passenger seat is very light,
(such as a child), the front PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF indicator may
illuminate.
When this indicator is ON, neither
the front passenger front air bag nor
front passenger side air bag will
deploy in either a side or frontal colli-
sion.
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person's legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wear-
ing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air
bag and the safety belt.
• The OCS may not function proper-
ly if the passenger takes actions
which can defeat the detection sys-
tem. These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-
tion.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
• The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates after the igni-
tion key is turned to the "ON" posi-
tion or after the engine is started. If
the front passenger seat is unoc-
cupied or is occupied by very small
person, or is occupied by someone
who is improperly seated, the
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator will remain illuminated. If the
front passenger seat is occupied
by someone of adult size and body
shape, the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator will turn off
after 6 seconds.
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator illuminates, neither
the front passenger front air bag
nor front passenger side air bag
will deploy in either a side or frontal
collision.
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is not illuminated,
the front passenger front air bag
and front passenger side air bag
may deploy in either a side or
frontal collision.
5GHN3002
The location of OCS warning indicator
Knowing your vehicle
683
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
Condition detected by
the occupant classifi-
cation system
1. Adult *
1
2. Child*
2
or child
restraint system
3. Unoccupied
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light
SRS warning light
Front passenger front
air bag and front
passenger side air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
*
1
The system detects a person who is generally adult size as an adult, thus allowing the pas-
senger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system
may detect their body shape as that of a child, thus preventing air bag deployment.
*
2
When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat,
the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her body shape or seating
position, thus permitting air bag deployment.
CAUTION
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates or blinks con-
tinuously when a person of adult size sits in the front passenger's
seat, it could be because that person isn't sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, make sure the seat back is not
reclined, have the passenger center on the seat cushion, with legs
comfortably extended, and the safety belt properly positioned. Restart
the vehicle and have the person remain in this position long enough to
allow the system to detect the person and activate the passenger air
bag.
CAUTION
If the occupant classification
system is not working properly,
the air bag warning light () on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate because the passenger’s
air bag is connected with the
occupant classification system.
If there is a malfunction of the
occupant classification system,
the "Passenger Air bag Off"
indicator will not illuminate and
the front passenger's air bag
will deploy in frontal crashes
even if there is child or no occu-
pant in the front passenger's
seat.
Have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the occupant classifica-
tion system with the SRS air bag
system as soon as possible if
any of following occur;
• The SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to "ON"
position.
(Continued)
369
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant
classification system, do not
install a child restraint system
in the front passenger seat.
The child could be severely
injured or killed if the air bag
deploys. Children are afford-
ed the most protection in the
event of an accident when
they are restrained by the
proper restraint system in the
rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's
seat is occupied by a person
of adult size who is seated
properly, or if the "PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator"
is not illuminated when the
front passenger's seat is
unoccupied or occupied by a
very small person, the occu-
pant classification system is
not working properly. Have
your vehicle immediately
inspected by your Kia dealer if
the occupant classification
system is not working proper-
ly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a very low weight adult is
seated in the front passenger
seat, the occupant classifica-
tion system may or may not
turn off the right front passen-
ger air bag, depending upon
the person's seating position
and body type. Everyone in
your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly -- whether
or not there is an air bag for
that person.
• If the front seat passenger
changes their seating position
(for example, by not sitting
upright, by sitting on the edge
of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), the
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator may be turned on,
and the passenger air bag
may not deploy in a collision.
Always be sure to sit properly
in the front passenger seat
and wear the safety belt prop-
erly and do not do any of the
following.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated after illu-
minating or blinking for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The SRS air bag warning light
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven.
Knowing your vehicle
703
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
1KMN3666
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the center con-
sole.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
- Always sit in a proper seating
position.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
(Continued)
1KMN3661
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
(Continued)
371
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• If luggage or other objects are
placed on the front passenger's
seat or if the temperature of the
seat changes while the seat is unoc-
cupied, the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator may blink.
These conditions do not indicate a
problem.
•
Do not put heavy objects on the front
passenger's seat. This may cause
front passenger air bag deployment
in the event of an accident, thus
increasing your repair costs.
WARNING
• The front seat passenger air
bag is much larger than the
steering wheel air bag and
inflates with considerably
more force. It can seriously
hurt or kill a passenger who is
not in the proper position and
wearing the safety belt proper-
ly. The front passengers
should always move their seat
as far back as practical and sit
back in their seat.
•
It is essential that the front pas-
senger always wears their safe-
ty belts, even when the vehicle
is moving in a parking lot or up
a driveway into garage.
• If the driver brakes the vehicle
heavily prior to an impact,
unbelted occupants will be
thrown forward. If the front
passenger is not wearing the
safety belts, they will be direct-
ly in front of the storage com-
partment when deployment
occurs. In that situation, seri-
ous injury or death is possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Manufacturers are required by
government regulations to
provide a contact point con-
cerning modifications to the
vehicle for persons with dis-
abilities, which modifications
may affect the vehicle’s
advanced air bag system.
That contact is Kia’s toll-free
Customer Assistance center
at 1-800-333-4KIA. However,
Kia does not endorse nor will
it support any changes to any
part or structure of the vehicle
that could affect the advanced
air bag system, including the
occupant classification sys-
tem. Specifically, the front
passenger seat, dashboard or
door should not be replaced
except by an authorized Kia
dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such
replacement or modification
could adversely affect the
operation of the occupant
classification system and your
advanced air bags.
(Continued)
(Continued)
For the same reason, do not
attach anything to the seat,
dashboard or door, even tem-
porarily. If the system is
adversely affected, it could
cause severe personal
injuries or death in a collision.
•
Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.These
can damage the occupant clas-
sification system, if they punc-
ture the seat cushion.
• Do not install accessory seat
covers on the front seats,
since these will interfere with
proper sensor operation.
Knowing your vehicle
723
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Side air bag
Side air bags are stored in the left
side of the driver’s seat, right side of
the front passenger’s seat and left
and right sides of the rear seats.
If air bag inflation conditions are met
(side collision), they will inflate.
WARNING
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers for the vehicle
equipped with side air bags.
Use of seat covers could inter-
fere with side air bag deploy-
ment.
If seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. Inform
them that your vehicle is
equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection
system.
• Do not make modifications or
additions to the seats. If inap-
propriate seats are used,
unexpected injury may result
in due to the malfunction of
the air bag system.
2GHA2125B
1GHA2126/1GHA2127
(Continued)
• Never allow front passenger
to put their hands, feet or face
on or close to the instrument
panel. In the event of air bag
deployment, such a misposi-
tioned occupant would be
likely to suffer severe injury or
death.
• Never allow children, pregnant
women or weak persons to sit
in the front passenger seat.
Do not put child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger's
seat either. They may be seri-
ously injured by the air bag
inflation when air bag
deploys.
• Do not put objects or stickers
on the instrument panel. Do
not apply any accessory to the
front windshield. Do not install
aftermarket mirrors or acces-
sories on the factory-installed
rearview mirror. Any of these
could interfere with the
deployment of the air bag or
could hit your body at high
speed and cause severe bodi-
ly injury and even death.
373
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
It is designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occu-
pants in certain side impact colli-
sions.
• If the curtain air bag deploys, it
remains inflated for approximately
3 seconds. The curtain air bag
deployment occurs only on the
side of the vehicle affected by the
impact.
• The side air bags (side and curtain
air bags) are not designed to
deploy during collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in
most rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy only during certain side-
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact. The curtain air bags are
not designed to deploy in all side
impact situations.
WARNING
• In order for side air bags (side
and curtain air bags) to pro-
vide its best protection, both
front seat occupants and both
outboard rear occupants
should sit in an upright posi-
tion with the seat belts proper-
ly fastened. Importantly, chil-
dren should sit in a proper
child restraint system in the
rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats, they
must be seated in the proper
child restraint system. Make
sure to put the child restraint
system as far away from the
door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint sys-
tem in a locked position.
• Do not allow the passengers
to lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with
side air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side cur-
tain air bag system. This
should only be done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle
occupants in an accident.
2GHA2125
2GHA2125A
Knowing your vehicle
743
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision?
(Inflation and non-inflation condi-
tions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional pro-
tection.
These include rear impacts, second
or third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts. In other words, just because
your vehicle is damaged and even if
it is totally unusable, don’t be sur-
prised that the air bags did not
inflate.
Air bag collision sensors
➀
SRS control module
➁
Front impact sensor
➂
Side impact sensor
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
C
O
O
A
ST
ST
T
C
O
A
C
O
A
T
S
E
T
E
T
E
T
S
E
S
R
ES
AC
C
E
L
AC
C
E
L
AC
C
E
L
C
C
E
L
1GHA2123C/2GHA0005A/1GHA2124/1GHA2128
➀
➁
➂
375
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag inflation condition
Front air bag
Front air bags (driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags) are designed to
inflate when the impact is delivered
to front collision sensors depending
on the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision - general-
ly from an area a little to the left to a
little to the right of straight ahead.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bag or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should, causing severe
injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sen-
sor installation angles are
changed due to the deforma-
tion of front bumper, body or B
pillar where side collision sen-
sors are installed. Have the
vehicle checked and repaired
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Your vehicle has been
designed to absorb impact
and deploy the air bag(s) in
certain collisions. Installing
aftermarket bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-
genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicles collision
and air bag deployment per-
formance.
1GHA2271
Knowing your vehicle
763
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Side air bag (if equipped)
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when
an impact is detected by side colli-
sion sensors depending on the
strength, speed or angles of impact
of side impact of side impact collision
or rollover.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate only in frontal col-
lision, it may inflate in any collision if
front impact sensors detect a suffi-
cient impact. Side air bags (side
and/or curtain air bags) are designed
to inflate only in side impact collision,
it may inflate in any collision if side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads or sidewalks, air bags may
deploy. Drive carefully on unim-
proved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
To protect occupants, front air bags
or pre-tensioner seat belts may
deploy in certain side impact colli-
sions.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because the risk of
injuries which can be caused by
the air bags exceeds the benefits
they provide in protecting occu-
pants.
AIR19B
2GHA2125A
1GHA2272
377
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
• Frontal air bags are not designed
to inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this
case, the air bags do not provide
proper protection.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collision, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
does not provide occupant protec-
tion.
However, side or curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the inten-
sity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
• In a slant or angled collision, the
force of impact may direct the
occupants in a direction between
the front and side air bags, and
thus the sensors may not deploy
any air bags.
1GHA2273 AIR19A 1GHA2270
Knowing your vehicle
783
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
altered by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover
accidents because air bag deploy-
ment would not provide proper pro-
tection to the occupants.
However, side air bags may inflate
when the vehicle is rolled over by a
side impact collision, if the vehicle
is equipped with side air bags and
curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
1GHA2274 AIR21 1GHA2275
379
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bag only operates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START positions.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side col-
lision (if equipped with side air bag
or curtain air bag) in order to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate by the severity of a collision
and its direction. These two factors
determine whether the sensors
send out an electronic deploy-
ment/inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehi-
cles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. However, fac-
tors are not limited to those men-
tioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident. It is much more likely that
you will simply see the deflated air
bags hanging out of their storage
compartments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of the extremely short time in which
a collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occu-
pant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which normally can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones, and sometimes
more serious injuries because that
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries, especially if the
occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the steering
wheel.
Knowing your vehicle
803
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breath-
ing due to the contact of your chest
to both the safety belt and the air
bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. We strongly
urge you to open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possi-
ble after impact in order to reduce
discomfort and prevent prolonged
exposure to the smoke and pow-
der.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
the cold water immediately and con-
sult the doctor if the symptom per-
sists.
WARNING - Seated
positioning
• Driver should sit as far back
(at least 10 inches (250 mm)
away) from the steering wheel
air bag as possible to reduce
the risk of injury or death in a
collision. The front passenger
should always move their seat
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not
in proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries which normally include
facial or bodily abrasions,
injuries by the broken glasses
or burns by the explosives.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the
air bag related parts in steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof
rails above the front and rear
doors are very hot. To prevent
injury, do not touch the air bag
storage areas internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated.
381
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger’s seat is for-
bidden.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraint in the front passen-
ger ‘s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the improp-
erly positioned or improperly
restrained child.
Airbag warning light
The purpose of the airbag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag - Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light should blink or
illuminate for approximately 6 sec-
onds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after the engine
starts.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
ADAIRBAG
AIR
BAG
WARNING
• Never put child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the
front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats in
which side air bags are
equipped, be sure to put the
child restraint system as far
away from the door side as
possible, and secure the child
restraint system to be locked
in position.
Inflation of side or curtain air
bag could cause serious
injury or death due to the
expansion impact.
Knowing your vehicle
823
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Air bag (Supplemental
Restraint System) service
Your Supplemental Restraint System
is virtually maintenance-free. There
are no parts which you can service.
You must have the system serviced
under the following circumstances:
• If an air bag ever inflates, the air
bag must be replaced. Do not try to
remove or discard the air bag by
yourself. This must be done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the air bag warning indicator light
alerts you to a problem, have the
air bag system checked as soon as
possible. Otherwise, your air bag
system may be ineffective.
When repairing or scrapping the
vehicles
• Repairing steering wheel, instru-
ment panel, center console or
roofs, or installing car audio around
center console or painting front
metal sheet could disable the air
bag system. Have them checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• When leaving the vehicle at an
authorized Kia dealer, inform the
facility that the vehicle is equipped
with air bag system, and leave the
owner’s manual in the vehicle.
• Since air bag system contains
explosive chemical substances,
contact an authorized Kia dealer
when scrapping the vehicle.
WARNING - No mainte-
nance or repair
• Do not modify your steering
wheel, seat or any other part
of the Supplemental Restraint
System. Modification could
make the system inoperable.
• Do not work on the system’s
components or wiring. This
could cause the air bags to
inflate inadvertently, possibly
seriously injuring someone.
Working on the system could
also disable the system so
that the air bags would not
deploy in a collision.
• Any work on the SRS system,
such as removing, installing,
repairing, or any work on the
steering wheel must be per-
formed by a qualified Kia tech-
nician. Improper handling of
the air bag system may result
in serious personal injury or
death.
CAUTION
- No modifica-
tion
Do not modify any part of the air
bag system. Modification could
make the air bag system ineffec-
tive or could cause unneces-
sary deployment.
383
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels which are now required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
are attached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings focus on the risk to children, Kia also wants you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to. Those have been described in previous pages.
4GHA2123A/5GHN2206/1GHA2131/1GHA2130
➀
➁
➂
(if equipped)
Knowing your vehicle
843
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Outside the vehicle
• To open the trunk, insert the key
into the lock (
➀
) and turn it clock-
wise (
➁
). If the trunk is opened
with the key while all the doors are
locked, trunk will be locked if
closed.
• To open the trunk, pull up (
➃
) the
trunk lid by pressing the button (
➂
)
of the trunk handle when the trunk
is unlocked. Trunk can be opened
by pressing the button (
➂
) of the
handle and pulling up the lid while
any door is unlocked.
• To close the trunk, use both hands
to push the trunk lid down. Check
to see if the trunk is completely
shut. If all the doors are locked
then trunk will be locked too.
• If the trunk lid control button in the
glove box is in the ON position
(depressed), trunk can be opened
with transmitter.
• If the trunk is opened with the
transmitter while all the doors are
locked, trunk will be locked when
closed.
• Trunk can not be opened with the
sub key.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not try to open trunk with the
sub key. It may damage the key set.
TRUNK
1GHA2017
PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
385
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Trunk room lamp
Trunk room lamp turns on when the
trunk is opened. It remains on until
the trunk is securely closed.
Inside the vehicle
To open the trunk from inside the
vehicle, make sure the trunk lid con-
trol button in the glove box is ON,
then pull trunk lid release switch (
➀
)
on the drivers door panel.
If the trunk lid control button in the
glove box is OFF, the trunk can only
be opened with the vehicle master
key.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the trunk lid
open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
causing serious injury or death
to vehicle occupants. Open
trunk lids can also dangerously
obscure rear view vision.
If you must drive with the trunk
lid open, keep the air vents open
so that additional outside air
comes into the vehicle.
1GHA2018
CAUTION
Make sure to close the trunk
securely. If it remains open
while engine is not running, it
may cause battery discharge
because trunk room lamp
remains on.
1GHA2019
Knowing your vehicle
863
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Emergency trunk safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency trunk release cable locat-
ed inside the trunk. The lever glows
in the dark when the trunk lid is
closed. If someone is inadvertently
locked in the trunk, pulling this han-
dle will release the trunk latch mech-
anism and open the trunk.
2GHA2020
WARNING
No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk of the vehicle
at any time. If the trunk is par-
tially or totally latched and the
person is unable to get out,
severe injury or death could
occur due to lack of ventilation,
exhaust fumes and rapid heat
build-up, or because of expo-
sure to cold weather conditions.
The trunk is also a highly dan-
gerous location in the event of a
crash because it is not a pro-
tected occupant space but
merely a part of the vehicle’s
crush zone.
Pull to open the trunk
CAUTION
• If a person is locked in the
trunk, they can pull the emer-
gency release to open the
trunk lid.
• We recommend that cars be
kept locked and keys be kept
out of the reach of children,
and that parents teach their
children about the dangers of
playing in trunks.
387
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Trunk lock system
The trunk lid control button located in
the vehicle glove box is used to pre-
vent unauthorized access to the
trunk.
Trunk locking
To activate the trunk lock system so
that the trunk can only be opened
with the master key, perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Open the glove box.
2. Set the trunk lid control button to
OFF position (not depressed).
3. Close the glove box and lock the
glove box with the master key.
When leaving the key with a parking
lot attendant or valet, perform steps
1 to 3 above and leave the sub key
with the attendent. Sub key can start
the engine and operate door locks
only.
Lock release
To release the trunk lock feature,
open the glove box with master key
and set the trunk lid control button to
ON position (depressed). In this
position the trunk will open with trunk
lid release switch or transmitter. The
trunk can never be opened with the
sub key.
1GHA2004
Knowing your vehicle
883
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Opening the hood:
1. Pull the release lever on the lower
left side of the instrument panel to
unlatch the hood. The hood
should pop open slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle,
slightly raise the hood, pull (
➁
) the
secondary latch (
➀
) inside of the
hood center and lift the hood.
3. Raise the hood. It will raise com-
pletely by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
Make sure the hood is properly
locked before driving.
HOOD
1GHA2023
2GHN3402
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, make
sure that all engine parts and
tools have been removed from
the engine area and that no
one’s hands are near the hood
opening.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
389
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
release button located on the dri-
ver’s lower door.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap counter-clockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks”. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
1GHA2021
MMSA3049
WARNING
To avoid injury from sharp
objects, it is recommended that
protective gloves be worn when
opening the fuel filler door man-
ually.
WARNING - Refueling
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cause serious injuries.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap is
venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
Knowing your vehicle
903
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
Automotive fuels are flamma-
ble/explosive materials. When
refueling, please note the fol-
lowing guidelines carefully.
Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe per-
sonal injury, severe burns or
death by fire or explosion.
• Before refueling always note
the location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station facility.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle or fuel filler cap, you
should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity
discharge by touching anoth-
er metal part of the front of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing. Do not touch, rub or slide
against any item or fabric
(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static
electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors resulting in explosion.
If you must re-enter the vehi-
cle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, away from
the fuel filler neck, nozzle or
other gasoline source.
•
When using a portable fuel con-
tainer be sure to place the con-
tainer on the ground prior to
refueling. Static electricity dis-
charge from the container can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. Once refueling has begun,
contact with the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling is
complete. Use only portable
fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones
around a gas station or while
refueling any vehicle. Electric
current and/or electronic
interference from cellular
phones can potentially ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire. If
you must use your cellular
phone use it in a place away
from the gas station.
• When refueling always shut
the engine off. Sparks pro-
duced by electrical compo-
nents related to the engine
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Always insure that the
engine is OFF before and dur-
ing refueling. Once refueling
is complete, check to make
sure the fuel filler cap and
door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
(Continued)
391
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Make sure to refuel with gasoline
(unleaded fuel) only for the gaso-
line engine vehicles.
• Check to make sure the fuel filler
cap is securely closed after refuel-
ing.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
Kia cap or the equivalent specified
for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel
filler cap can result in a serious
malfunction of the fuel system or
emission control system. Correct
replacement caps are available at
authorized Kia dealers.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of
fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• A loose fuel filler cap may cause
the “Check Engine” (Malfunction
Indicator) light in the instrument
panel to illuminate unnecessarily.
• If the fuel filler lid will not open in
cold weather because the area
around it is frozen, push or lightly
tap the lid.
When fuel filler lid does not open
with the release button
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the emergency hook for fuel
filler lid inside the trunk.
1GHA2022
(Continued)
• Do not light any fire around a
gas station. DO NOT use
matches or a lighter and DO
NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cig-
arette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can,
when ignited, result in explo-
sion by flames.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station or contact the police
and local fire department.
Follow any safety instructions
they provide.
Knowing your vehicle
923
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface of
the glass. If ice should restrict move-
ment of the mirror, do not force the
mirror for adjustment. To remove
ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge
or soft cloth with very warm water.
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror, move the lever
(
➀
) to R or L to select the right side
mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point (▲) on
the mirror adjustment control to posi-
tion the selected mirror up, down, left
or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into
neutral position to prevent the inad-
vertent adjustment.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hands.
Doing so may damage the parts.
MIRRORS
2GHA2205
CAUTION
• The right outside rearview
mirror is convex. Objects seen
in the mirror are closer than
they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mir-
ror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when
changing lanes.
➀
393
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Automatic mirror adjustment in
reverse maneuvers (if equipped)
When the transaxle gear is shifted
into reverse (R), the outside rearview
mirror(s) will automatically be turned
downward about 5 degrees to
improve driver visibility. It will stay in
that position until the transaxle shift
lever is shifted out of reverse (R).
L : Both the left and right out-
side rearview mirrors will be
turned downward about 5
degrees.
R : Only the right outside
rearview mirror will be
turned downward about 5
degrees.
Center: Automatic mirror adjustment
function is disabled, no mir-
ror will be turned downward.
The outside rearview mirror(s) will
return to its previous position auto-
matically if outside rearview mirror
selection switch is changed to anoth-
er position, or transaxle shift lever is
shifted out of reverse (R).
(Examples)
If the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R) when the outside
rearview mirror selection switch is in
L, both the right and left outside
rearview mirrors will automatically be
turned down 5 degrees
If the outside rearview mirror selec-
tion switch is set to R while shift lever
is in reverse (R), the left outside
rearview mirror will return to its previ-
ous position. The right outside
rearview mirror will not return to it’s
previous position.
If the shift lever is shifted into any
other range OR the outside rearview
mirror selection switch is set to cen-
ter, the right outside rearview mirror
will automatically return to its original
position.
2GHA2037
Center
Knowing your vehicle
943
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CAUTION
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out
the rear window.
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Outside rearview mirror heater
(if equipped)
The outside rearview mirror heater is
actuated in connection with the rear
window defroster. To heat the outside
rearview mirror glass, push the but-
ton for the rear window defroster.
The outside rearview mirror glass will
be heated for defrosting or defogging
and will give you improved rear
vision in inclement weather condi-
tions. Push the button again to turn
the heater off. The outside rearview
mirror heater automatically turns off
after 20 minutes.
Day/night rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center
on the view through the rear window.
Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
E1V2B03032
395
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Manual type
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electric type (if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlights of the car behind you in
nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-
ror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and through a chemical
reaction, automatically controls the
headlight glare from vehicles behind
you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
• Type A (if equipped)
Press the button (
➀
) to turn the auto-
matic- dimming function on, the mir-
ror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the button (
➀
) once again to
turn the automatic- dimming function
off. The mirror indicator light will turn
off.
2GHA2203
Day
Night
Day/Night lever
2GHA2204A
Sensor
➀
Indicator
Knowing your vehicle
963
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
• Type B (if equipped)
Press the “O” button to turn the auto-
matic- dimming function off. The mir-
ror indicator light will turn off.
Press the “I” button to turn the auto-
matic- dimming function on, the mir-
ror indicator light will illuminate.
✽✽
NOTICE
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do not
spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2GHN3310
397
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Map light
Front (if equipped)
The lights are turned ON or OFF by
pressing the corresponding switch.
Dome light (if equipped)
➀
OFF - The light stays off even
when a door is open.
➁
DOOR - The light turns on or off
when a door is opened
or closed.
Interior light goes out
slowly if the door is
closed.
When a door is unlocked
by the transmitter, interi-
or light stays on for 30
seconds as long as the
door is not opened.
➂
ON - The light turns on and stays
on even when the doors are
all closed.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2GHA2060
OFF DOOR ON
E2BLA324
Knowing your vehicle
983
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Door courtesy lamp
The door courtesy lamp comes ON
when the door is opened to assist
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also
serves as a warning to passing vehi-
cles that the vehicle door is open.
2GHB3004
399
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage com-
partment.
• Since stored items may move while
driving, be sure to position them
in the storage compartment so
that they do not make noise or
cause a potential safety hazard
when the vehicle is moving.
• Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover can not close securely.
Center console storage
To open either of the console stor-
age compartments, press button
➀
or
➁
.
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or front passenger.
Multi box
Front (if equipped)
To open the cover, push the button
and lift the cover up to open. It can
be used for storing small items
required by the driver or front pas-
senger.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
1GHA2106
2GHN2109
Knowing your vehicle
1003
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rear (if equipped)
To open the storage compartment,
pull the armrest down and pull up on
the locking tab (
➀
). It can be used for
storing small items.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked (
➀
) and
unlocked (
➁
) with a master key.
It cannot be locked/unlocked with the
sub key.
To open the glove box, make sure it
is unlocked, then pull the handle (
➂
)
and the glove box will automatically
open (
➃
). Close the glove box after
use.
✽✽
NOTICE
Since key is not fully inserted into
the glove box key set, do not apply
excessive force. Doing so may dam-
age the parts.
1GHA2234A
1GHA2086
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of injury in
case of an accident or sudden
stop, always keep the glove box
door closed while driving.
3 101
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Sunglass holder
A sunglass storage compartment is
provided on the overhead console.
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses in the
compartment door with the lenses
facing out. Push to close.
✽✽
NOTICE
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
2GHA2060B
Knowing your vehicle
1023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cigarette lighter
Front
To use the cigarette lighter, press
the front face then release it to allow
the cigarette lighter and ashtray to
slowly extend from center panel.
To operate the cigarette lighter, press
it in and release it. When it is heated,
it automatically pops out ready for
use.
If the engine is not running, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC posi-
tion for the lighter to operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not hold the lighter in after it is
already heated because it will
overheat.
• Only a genuine Kia lighter should
be used in the cigarette lighter
socket. The use of plug-in acces-
sories (shavers, hand-held vacu-
ums, and coffee pots, for example)
may damage the socket or cause
electrical failure.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
Ashtrays
Front
To use the ashtray, press the front
face and release it to allow the ciga-
rette lighter and ashtray to slowly
extend from center panel.
To remove the ashtray, grasp the
ashtray bucket (
➀
) and carefully pull
it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
1GHA2084
1GHA2084A
3 103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Front
To open the cup holder cover, press
the cover and it will automatically
open. Push the cover to close after
use.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ash-
trays as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or match-
es in an ashtray with other
combustible materials may
cause a fire.
WARNING
- Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
If the hot liquid spills, you
could be burned. Such a burn
to the driver could cause a
loss of control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or insecure bot-
tles, glasses, cans, etc., in the
cup holder while the vehicle is
in motion.
2GHN2088
Knowing your vehicle
1043
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rear
To use cup holders in rear seat, pull
down the rear seat armrest.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not place heavy cups or cans in
cup holders. Cup holders could be
damaged.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (
➀
) and swing it to the side.
To use the vanity mirror, pull down
the visor and pull up the mirror cover
(
➁
).
Pull the extension panel (
➂
) of the
sunvisor to lengthen the sunvisor.
1GHA2089
2GHN482
3 105
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to
its original position after use. If the
vanity mirror is not closed securely,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and pos-
sible sunvisor damage.
Power socket (if equipped)
The power outlets are designed to
provide power for mobile telephones
or other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
2GHN3340
1GHA2234
Front (if equipped)
Rear
2GHN3350
Center (if equipped)
Knowing your vehicle
1063
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
✽✽
NOTICE
• Use when the engine is running
and remove a plug from the power
outlet after using the electric
appliance. Using when the engine
stops or remaining the electric
appliance with plugged in for
many hours may cause the battery
to be discharged.
• Only use the electric appliances
which are less than 12V and 10A
in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operation level
when you have to use the power
socket while using air-conditioner
or heater.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference and when
plugged into a vehicle's power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and mal-
functions in other electronic sys-
tems or devices used in your vehi-
cle.
Clock
Analog (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals, A/V
CLOCK fuse, or Power Connect are
disconnected, you must reset the
time.
When the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the clock but-
tons operate as follows:
➀
(+) : time increases one minute
each time the button is
pressed. It increases continu-
ously if pressed longer than 3
seconds.
➁
(-) : time decreases one minute
each time the button is
pressed. It decreases continu-
ously if pressed longer than 3
seconds.
5GHA2232
➀
➁
3 107
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Digital (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals, A/V
CLOCK fuse, or Power Connect are
disconnected, you must reset the
time.
Press the Clock Control PUSH but-
ton in front of the monitor to access
the mode set buttons. Use these
buttons to adjust the time/date dis-
played on the monitor.
1. Press the MODE button (
➀
).
2. Select the mode to be reset; hour
(
➁
), minute (
➂
), month (
➃
) and
date (
➄
).
3. Reset the data using button ▼ (
➅
)
or button ▲ (
➆
) while the selected
mode blinks.
If the ▼ (
➅
) or ▲ (
➆
) button(s) are
pressed for more than 3 seconds,
the display will begin to change
rapidly. When the ▼ (
➅
) or ▲ (
➆
)
button(s) are pressed then
released, the display will change
in single increments.
4. Press the SET (
➇
) button when
the data is correctly set.
1GHA2110
➀
➆ ➇
➅
➁
➂ ➃
➄
Knowing your vehicle
1083
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If your vehicle is equipped with this
feature, you can slide or tilt your sun-
roof with the sunroof control buttons
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control button(s) after the
sunroof is in the fully open, closed,
or tilt position(s). Damage to the
motor or system components
could occur.
• The sunroof cannot slide when it is
in the tilt position nor can it be tilt-
ed while in an open or slide posi-
tion.
Sliding the sunroof
Autoslide open
To use the autoslide feature,
momentarily (more than 1 second)
press the SLIDE OPEN button on the
overhead console. The sunroof will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof sliding at any point, press
any sunroof control button.
Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN button on
the overhead console for less than
0.5 second.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the
CLOSE button on the overhead con-
sole and hold it until the sunroof is
closed.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
SLIDE
SLIDE
OPEN
OPEN
TILT
TILT
UP
UP
CLOSE
CLOSE
SLIDE
SLIDE
OPEN
OPEN
TILT
TILT
UP
UP
CLOSE
CLOSE
2GHA2060A
3 109
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Tilting the sunroof
Autotilt open
To use the autotilt feature, momen-
tarily (more than 1 second) press the
TILT UP button on the overhead
console. The sunroof will tilt all the
way open. To stop the sunroof tilting
at any point, press any sunroof con-
trol button.
Manual tilt open
Press the TILT UP button on the
overhead console for less than 0.5
second.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the
CLOSE button on the overhead con-
sole and hold it until the sunroof is
closed.
Sunshade
The sunshade will be opened with
the glass panel automatically when
the glass panel is slid. You will have
to close it manually if you want it
closed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not press any sunroof control
button longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the glass
or the motor could be damaged.
• The sunroof is made to slide
together with sunshade. Do not
leave the sunshade closed while
the sunroof is open.
• Remove any dirt that may be
accumu-lated on the guide rail
periodically.
E2BLA361
WARNING
• Do not extend face or arms
outside through the sunroof
opening while driving.
• Make sure hand and face are
safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
Knowing your vehicle
1103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
In case of an emergency
If the sunroof does not open electri-
cally:
1. Remove the lens.
2. Remove the two (2) screws, and
then remove the overhead con-
sole.
3. Insert the emergency handle (pro-
vided with the vehicle) and turn
the handle clockwise to open or
counterclockwise to close.
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, or you use
the emergency handle to operate the
sunroof, you have to reset your sun-
roof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
2. According to the position of the
sunroof, do as follows.
1) in case that the sunroof has
closed completely or been tilt-
ed
: Press the TILT UP button for 1
second.
2) in case that the sunroof has
slide-opened
: Press and hold the CLOSE
button for more than 5 sec-
onds until the sunroof has
closed completely. And then
press the TILT UP button for 1
second
3. Then, release it.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP button
once again until the sunroof has
returned to the original position of
TILT UP after it is raised a little
higher than the maximum TILT UP
position.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
S2BLA329
3 111
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Knowing your vehicle
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is
turned on while the ignition key is in
either the “ON” or “ACC” position,
your car will receive both AM and FM
broadcast signals through the anten-
na in the rear window glass.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or use
a scraper to remove the foreign
deposits as this may cause damage
to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coating
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
broadcast signals.
ANTENNA
MMSA3076
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ignition switch / 4-2
Starting the engine / 4-4
Automatic transaxle / 4-5
Brake system / 4-11
Steering wheel / 4-18
Cruise control system / 4-21
Traction control system / 4-26
Electronic stability program / 4-29
Instrument cluster / 4-32
Gauges / 4-34
Warnings and indicators / 4-36
Lighting / 4-44
Wipers and washers / 4-49
Defroster / 4-52
Hazard warning flasher / 4-53
Automatic climate control system / 4-54
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-69
Driving your vehicle
10
Driving your vehicle
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a door is opened, the igni-
tion switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off approximately 10 sec-
onds after closing the door or when
the ignition switch is turned on.
Ignition switch and anti-theft
steering column lock
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning lamp
can be checked in this position.
If difficulty is experienced in turning
the ignition key to the START posi-
tion, turn the steering wheel right
and left to release the tension and
then turn the key.
IGNITION SWITCH
P
U
S
H
1GHA3201 1GHA3201A
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, the shift lever
must be in the P (Park) position.
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch
to LOCK or ACC while the
vehicle is moving. This would
result in loss of directional
control and braking function,
which could cause an immedi-
ate accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged
in P (Park), set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precau-
tions are not taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
• Do not put any movable things
around the driver’s seat as
they can disturb your driving
and may cause accidents.
Driving your vehicle
44
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle
has not been operated for several
days, let the engine warm up with-
out depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm,
it should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
STARTING THE ENGINE
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may
put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
position in an attempt to restart
the engine.
45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
2GHN3001
The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting.
The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports mode
Automatic mode
Lock release button prevents shift lever
movement without first depressing the
button.
Driving your vehicle
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Automatic transaxle operation
All normal forward driving is done
with the shift lever in the D (Drive)
position.
To move the shift lever from the P
(Park) position, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the lock release
button must be depressed.
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the brakes
on.
• When stopped on an upgrade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the service
brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
2GHA3002A
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Automatic
mode
Sports mode
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (PARK) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Transaxle ranges
P (park)
This position locks the transaxle and
prevents the front wheels from rotat-
ing. Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into this position.
✽✽
NOTICE
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (PARK)
position. Set the parking
brake fully, shut the engine off
and take the key with you.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement can occur if you
do not follow these precau-
tions in the order specified.
• Never leave a child unattend-
ed in a vehicle.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause
the drive wheels to lock which
will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake. Always make sure the
shift lever is latched in the P
(Park) position so that it can-
not be moved unless the lock
release button is pushed in,
AND set the parking brake
fully.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
84
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R (reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R while
the vehicle is in motion, except as
explained in “Rocking the Vehicle”,
in this manual.
N (neutral)
With the gearshift in the N position,
the wheels and transaxle are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 5-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will auto-
matically downshift to the next lower
gear.
49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the “D”
position into the sports mode. To
return to “D” range operation, push
the shift lever back into the automat-
ic mode.
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one gear.
Snow mode
When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever
to the -(down) side to shift back to
the 1st gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Upshifts do not take place auto-
matically in sports mode. The
driver must execute upshifts in
accordance with road conditions,
taking care to keep the engine
speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the five for-
ward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the “R” or “P”
position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
1GHA3002
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Automatic
mode
Sports mode
Driving your vehicle
104
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Moving up a steep grade from
a standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on
a steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards.
Shifting the shift lever into 2
(Second Gear) while in Sport
mode will help prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling backwards.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the Automatic
Transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
out of P (Park) unless the brake
pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
to the ON position.
3. Depress the lock release button
and move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering sound near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
Ignition key inter lock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. If the ignition switch
is in any other position, the key can-
not be removed.
411
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING
- Parking brake
Depressing the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a sud-
den loss of control of the vehi-
cle. If you must use the parking
brake to stop the vehicle, use
great caution in applying the
brake.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous applica-
tion of the brakes. Continuous
brake application will cause
the brakes to overheat and
could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
124
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and
it's time for new pads, you will hear a
high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
To avoid costly brake repairs, do not
continue to drive with worn brake
pads.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs serv-
ice. If you ignore this audible
warning, you will eventually lose
braking performance, which
could lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle sets.
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may result in the
vehicle not slowing down at
the usual rate and pulling to
one side when the brakes are
applied. Applying the brakes
lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this
way. Always test your brakes
in this fashion after driving
through deep water.To dry the
brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe for-
ward speed until brake per-
formance returns to normal.
413
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, depress the
parking brake pedal fully and firmly
downward while applying the service
brake.
Manual release
To release the parking brake, pull the
parking brake release lever while
applying the service brake. The
pedal will automatically extend to the
fully released position. If the parking
brake pedal does not release or does
not release all the way, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
1GHA3011 1GHA3012
WARNING - Parking brake
• To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the gearshift lever in place of
the parking brake. Set the
parking brake AND make sure
the gearshift lever is securely
positioned in P (Park).
• Never allow a person who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle or
children to touch the parking
brake. If the parking brake is
released unintentionally, seri-
ous injury may occur.
Driving your vehicle
144
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Parking on curbed streets
• When parking your vehicle on an
uphill grade, park as close to the
curb as possible and turn the front
wheels away from the curb so that
the front wheels will contact the
curb if the vehicle moves back-
ward.
• When parking your vehicle on a
downhill grade, park as close to the
curb as possible and turn the front
wheels toward the curb so that the
front wheels will contact the curb if
the vehicle moves forward.
W-75
415
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS system continuously sens-
es the speed of the wheels. If the
wheels are going to lock, the ABS
system repeatedly modulates the
hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS system is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS system in an
emergency situation, do not attempt
to modulate your brake pressure and
do not try to pump your brakes.
Press your brake pedal as hard as
possible or as hard as the situation
warrants and allow the ABS system
to control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
WARNING - ABS Brakes
Your ABS is not a substitute for
good driving judgement. You
can still have an accident. In
fact, your ABS system will prob-
ably not be able to prevent an
accident in the following driving
conditions:
• Dangerous driving, such as
neglecting safety precautions,
speeding, or driving too close
to the vehicle in front of you.
• Driving at high speed in situa-
tions providing considerably
less traction, such as wet con-
ditions where hydroplaning
could occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driving too fast on poor road
surfaces. The ABS is
designed to improve maxi-
mum braking effectiveness on
typical highways and roads in
good condition. On poor road
surfaces in poor condition,
the ABS may actually reduce
braking effectiveness.
Driving your vehicle
164
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS system. In this case,
however, your regular brakes will
work normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then yourABS
system is normal. Otherwise, you
may have a problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
ABS
W-78
417
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS is malfunc-
tioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
184
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Power steering
Power Steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the
vehicle. If the engine is off or if the
power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
Electronic power steering
The wheel speed sensor controls
steering power according to the vehi-
cle’s speed.
The steering wheel becomes heavier
as the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for the better con-
trol of the steering wheel.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right or
left turn) for more than 5 seconds
with the engine running. Holding
the steering wheel for more than 5
seconds in either position may
cause damage to the power steer-
ing pump.
• If the power steering drive belt
breaks or if the power steering
pump malfunctions, the steering
effort will greatly increase.
STEERING WHEEL
419
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather
(below -10 °C/14 °F), the power
steering may require increased
effort when the engine is first start-
ed. This is caused by increased fluid
viscosity due to the cold weather and
does not indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing accelera-
tor until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm
then release or let the engine idle for
two or three minutes to warm up the
fluid.
Tilt steering (if equipped)
A tilt steering wheel allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you
drive.You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the
vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull up the lock release lever (
➀
),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (
➁
), then release the
lock-release lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion before driving.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of
steering wheel while driving.
You may lose your steering
control and cause severe per-
sonal injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
2GHA2032
➀
➁
Driving your vehicle
204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
CAUTION
• To sound the horn, press the
area indicated by the horn
symbol on your steering
wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when
this area is pressed.
• Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
CO
A
ST
SET
RES
ACCEL
2GHA2034
421
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without resting your
foot on the accelerator pedal.
With cruise control, you can set and
automatically maintain any speed of
between 24 mph (40 km/h) and
96 mph (160 km/h).
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button
on the steering wheel, to turn the
system on. The CRUISE indicator
light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 24 mph
(40 km/h) and less than 96 mph
(160 km/h).
CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Cruise
control
Do not use the cruise control
feature under the following con-
ditions:
• Heavy or unsteady traffic
• Slippery or winding roads
• Situations that involve varying
speeds
WARNING
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when cruise control is not in
use.
RES
ACCEL
COAST
SET
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCE
L
COAST
SET
RES
ACCEL
2GHA2034A
2GHA2035A
Type A
Type B
Driving your vehicle
224
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3. Depress the COAST/SET switch,
located on the steering wheel, and
release it at the speed you want.
The “SET” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
The SET function cannot be activated
until approximately 2 seconds after the
CRUISE ON/OFF button has been
engaged.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while going
downhill.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral).
• Depress the CANCEL switch locat-
ed on the steering wheel.
• Depress the COAST/SET and
RES/ACCEL switches at the same
time.
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the “SET”
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go OFF), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, depress the
RES/ACCEL switch located on your
steering wheel.You will return to your
previously preset speed.
RES
ACCEL
COAST
SET
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
COAST
SET
RES
ACCEL
2GHA2034B
2GHA2035B
Type A
Type B
423
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button
on the steering wheel (the CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument
cluster will go OFF).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To Set
Cruise Control Speed” on the previ-
ous page.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Depress the RES/ACCEL switch
and hold it.Your vehicle will acceler-
ate. Release the switch at the speed
you want.
• Depress the RES/ACCEL switch
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) by one touch and will be
memorized to the reset speed.
RES
ACCEL
COAST
SET
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCE
L
COAST
SET
RES
ACCEL
2GHA2034C
2GHA2035C
Type A
Type B
Driving your vehicle
244
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Depress the COAST/SET switch
and hold it. Your vehicle will gradu-
ally slow down. Release the switch
at the speed you want to maintain.
• Depress the COAST/SET switch
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) by one touch and will be
memorized to the reset speed.
RES
ACCEL
COAST
SET
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
COAST
SET
RES
ACCEL
2GHA2034B
2GHA2035B
Type A
Type B
425
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruising speed at
more than 24 mph (40 km/h):
If any method other than the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch was used to
cancel cruising speed and the sys-
tem is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume
when the RES/ACCEL switch is
depressed.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below 24
mph (40km/h).
RES
ACCEL
COAST
SET
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
CRUISE
ON/OFF
CANCEL
COAST
SET
RES
ACCEL
2GHA2034C
2GHA2035C
Type A
Type B
Driving your vehicle
264
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The Traction Control System (TCS)
helps the vehicle accelerate on slip-
pery road surfaces by preventing the
drive wheels from spinning exces-
sively. It also provides improved driv-
ing force and steering.
TCS operation
TCS ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, TCS and TCS OFF
indicator light illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then TCS is turned on.
• Press the TCS button to
turn TCS off. (TCS OFF
indicator will illuminate).To
turn the TCS on, press the
TCS button (TCS OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the TCS
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the TCS is in opera-
tion, TCS indicator light
blinks.
• When the traction control
system is operating prop-
erly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle.
This is only the effect of
brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of mud
or driving on a slippery
road, pressing the accel-
erator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1GHA2051D
-
TCS
427
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
TCS operation off
TCS OFF state
• To cancel TCS operation,
press the TCS button
(TCS OFF indicator light
illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK position
when TCS is off, TCS
remains off. Upon restart-
ing the engine, the TCS will
automatically turn on
again.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if TCS system is operating
normally.
The TCS indicator light blinks when-
ever TCS is operating.
TCS OFF indicator light comes on
when either the TCS is turned off
with the button, or TCS fails to oper-
ate when turned on.
TCS
OFF
TCS
TCS
OFF
■ TCS indicator light (blinks)
■ TCS OFF indicator light (comes on)
WARNING
The Traction Control System is
only a driving aid; use precau-
tions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever
the TCS indicator light is blink-
ing, or when the road surface is
slippery.
Driving your vehicle
284
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TCS OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the TCS
turned on for daily driving whenev-
er possible.
• To turn TCS off while driving, press
the TCS button while driving on a
flat road surface.
Never press TCS button while TCS is
operating (TCS indicator light blinks).
If TCS is turned off while TCS is
operating, the vehicle may slip out of
control.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When measuring the vehicle speed
with a Chassis dynamo-meter,
make sure the TCS is turned off
(TCS OFF light illuminated). If
the TCS is left on, it may prevent
the vehicle speed from increasing,
and cause a false diagnosis of a
faulty speedometer.
• Turning the TCS off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
WARNING
Never press the TCS button
while TCS is operating.
If the TCS is turned off while
TCS is operating, the vehicle
may slip out of control.
To turn TCS off while driving,
press the TCS button while driv-
ing on a flat road surface.
429
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
The Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) monitors information from var-
ious vehicle sensors and then com-
pares the driver's commands with
the actual behavior of the vehicle. If
an unstable condition occurs - a sud-
den evasive movement for example -
ESP intervenes within fractions of a
second via the engine computer and
brake system and attempts to stabi-
lize the vehicle.
ESP operation
ESP ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESP and ESP OFF
indicator lights illuminate
for approximately 3 sec-
onds, then ESP is turned
on.
• Press the ESP button to
turn ESP off. (ESP OFF
indicator will illuminate).To
turn the ESP on, press the
ESP button (ESP OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESP
performing an automatic
system self-check and
does not indicate a prob-
lem.
When operating
When the ESP is in opera-
tion, ESP indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Program is oper-
ating properly, you can feel
a slight pulsation in the
vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or slippery road,
pressing the accelerator
pedal may not cause the
bv engine rpm (revolutions
per minute) to increase.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (IF EQUIPPED)
-
ESP
ESP
2GHN2051D
Driving your vehicle
304
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ESP operation off
ESP OFF state
• To cancel ESP operation,
press the ESP button
(ESP OFF indicator light
illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK position
when ESP is off, ESP
remains off. Upon restart-
ing the engine, the ESP will
automatically turn on
again.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if ESP system is operating
normally.
The ESP indicator light blinks when-
ever ESP is operating.
ESP OFF indicator light comes on
when either the ESP is turned off
with the button, or ESP fails to oper-
ate when turned on.
ESP
OFF
ESP
ESP
OFF
■ ESP indicator light (blinks)
■ ESP OFF indicator light (comes on)
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Program
system is only a driving aid; use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved, snowy,
or icy roads. Drive slowly and
don’t attempt to accelerate
whenever the ESP indicator light
is blinking, or when the road sur-
face is slippery.
431
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
ESP OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESP
turned on for daily driving whenev-
er possible.
• To turn ESP off while driving, press
the ESP button while driving on a
flat road surface.
Never press ESP button while ESP is
operating (ESP indicator light blinks).
If ESP is turned off while ESP is
operating, the vehicle may slip out of
control.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When measuring the vehicle speed
with a Chassis dynamo-meter,
make sure the ESP is turned off
(ESP OFF light illuminated). If the
ESP is left on, it may prevent the
vehicle speed from increasing, and
cause a false diagnosis of a faulty
speedometer.
• Turning the ESP off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
WARNING
Never press the ESP button
while ESP is operating.
If the ESP is turned off while
ESP is operating, the vehicle
may slip out of control.
To turn ESP off while driving,
press the ESP button while driv-
ing on a flat road surface.
10
Driving your vehicle
324
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (TYPE A)
5GHN3360
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Odometer / Tripmeter
7. Tripmeter mode/reset button
8. Shift position indicator
9. Fuel gauge
✶ will say if equipped with ESP
ESP
ESP
OFF
✶
10
433
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (TYPE B)
5GHN3370
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Odometer / Tripmeter
7. Tripmeter mode/reset button
8. Shift position indicator
9. Fuel gauge
✶ will say if equipped with ESP
ESP
ESP
OFF
✶
Driving your vehicle
344
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the for-
ward speed of the vehicle.
Odometer/Tripmeter
You can choose the odometer, trip-
meter A and tripmeter B by pressing
the tripmeter mode button.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
Tripmeter
TRIP A: Tripmeter A
TRIP B: Tripmeter B
The tripmeter indicates the distance
of individual trips selected by the
driver. Tripmeter A and B can be
reset to 0 by pressing the reset but-
ton for 1 second or more, and then
releasing.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move
slightly when the ignition switch is in
ACC or ON position with the engine
OFF. This movement is normal and
will not affect the accuracy of the
tachometer once the engine is run-
ning.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not operate the engine within the
tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine dam-
age.
GAUGES
5GHN3360
Type A
Type B
5GHN3370
435
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature
of the engine coolant when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to “Overheating” in the
Index.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheat-
ing that may damage the engine.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approx-
imate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
Fuel tank capacity - 18.49 US gal.
(70 litres).
The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will illu-
minate when the fuel level has
dropped to about 2.38 US gal. (9
liters).
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, rotate the illumina-
tion control knob to adjust the instru-
ment panel illumination intensity.
2GHN2052
Driving your vehicle
364
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Warning lights / audible indi-
cators
Checking operation
All warning lights are checked by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). Any light that does
not illuminate should be checked by
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
After starting the engine, check to
make sure that all warning lights are
off. If any are still on, this indicates a
situation that needs attention. When
releasing the parking brake, the
brake system warning light should go
off. The fuel warning light will stay on
if the fuel level is low.
Anti-lock brake sys-
tem (ABS) warning
light (if equipped)
This light illuminates if the key is
turned to ON and goes off in approx-
imately 3 seconds if the system is
operating normally.
If the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic brake force
distribution (EBD) sys-
tem warning light
(if equipped)
If two warning lights illumi-
nate at the same time
while driving, your vehicle
has a problem with ABS
and EBD system.
In this case, your ABS system and
regular brake system may not work
normally. Have the vehicle checked
by an Authorized Kia Dealer as soon
as possible.
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
ABS
ABS
WARNING
If the both ABS and Brake warn-
ing lights are ON and stay ON,
your vehicle’s brake system will
not work normally. So you may
experience an unexpected and
dangerous situation when
abrupt braking. In this case,
avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking. Have your vehi-
cle checked by Authorized Kia
Dealer as soon as possible.
437
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Engine oil pressure
warning
This warning light indicates the
engine oil pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while
driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road
and stop.
2. With the engine off, check the
engine oil level. If the level is low,
add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine is not stopped immedi-
ately, severe damage could result.
Charging system
warning
This warning light indicates a mal-
function of either the generator or
electrical charging system.
If the warning light comes on while
the vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the gen-
erator drive belt for looseness or
breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a
problem exists somewhere in the
electrical charging system. Have
an Authorized Kia Dealer correct
the problem as soon as possible.
Safety belt warning
If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not
fastened when the key is turned ON
or if it is unfastened after the key is
ON, the safety belt warning light
blinks until the belt is fastened.
If the system does not operate as
described, see an Authorized Kia
Dealer for assistance.
Driving your vehicle
384
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Front fog light indica-
tor (if equipped)
This light comes on when the front
fog lights are ON.
Stop/Tail light failure
warning
This light indicates a malfunction in
the stop/tail light circuit, such as a
burned out bulb. If this indicator
comes on, check for a burned out
stop/tail lamp, if the indicator is still
on have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer for service.
Shift pattern indica-
tors
The individual indicators
illuminate to show the shift
lever selection. The R
(Reverse) symbol is illumi-
nated by a red light and
the P (Park), N (Neutral),
D (Drive) and 1~5 sym-
bols are illuminated by
green lights.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON posi-
tion. The warning light should go off
when the parking brake is released.
439
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in
the reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check
the brake fluid level immediately
and add fluid as required. Then
check all brake components for
fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks
are found, the warning light
remains on or the brakes do not
operate properly. Have it towed to
any Authorized Kia Dealer for a
brake system inspection and nec-
essary repairs.
To check bulb operation, check
whether the parking brake and brake
fluid warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
Trunk lid open
warning
This warning light activates when the
trunk is not closed securely.
Low fuel level
warning
This warning light indicates the fuel
tank is nearly empty. The warning
light will come on when the fuel level
has dropped to about 2.38 US gal. (9
liters). Refuel as soon as possible.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light on is dangerous. If the
brake warning light remains on,
have the brakes checked and
repaired immediately by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
Driving your vehicle
404
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Door ajar warning
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the
ignition in any position.
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
This light illuminates when the immo-
bilizer key is inserted and turned to
the ON position to start the engine.
If this light turns off or blinks when
the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion before starting the engine, have
the system checked by an authorized
Kia Dealer.
Headlight high beam
indicator
This indicator illuminates when the
headlights are on and in the high
beam position or when the turn sig-
nal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-
Pass position.
Malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator light is part of the
Engine Control System which moni-
tors various emission control system
components. If this light illuminates
while driving, it indicates that a
potential problem has been detected
somewhere in the emission control
system.
Generally, your vehicle will continue
to be drivable and will not need tow-
ing, but have the system checked by
an Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as
possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
A loose fuel filler cap may cause the
On Board Diagnostic System
Malfunction Indicator Light ( ) in
the instrument panel to illuminate
unnecessarily. Always make sure
that the fuel filler cap is tight.
441
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Air bag warning
(if equipped)
This warning light will blink or illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
each time you turn the ignition switch
to the ON position.
If this indicator does not go out, or if
it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, see an Authorized Kia
Dealer for immediate service.
Low washer fluid level
warning indicator (if equipped)
This warning light indicates the
washer fluid reservoir is near empty.
Refill the washer fluid as soon as
possible.
Auto cruise indicator
(if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when
the cruise control system is enabled.
SET indicator
The indicator light illuminates when
the cruise function switch (COAST/
SET or RES/ACCEL) is ON.
CAUTION
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light
( ) illuminated may cause
damage to the emission con-
trol systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
•
If the
Emission
Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light
( ) begins to flash ON and
OFF, potential catalytic con-
verter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power. Have the Engine
Control System inspected as
soon as possible by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
CRUISE
SET
AIR
BAG
or
Driving your vehicle
424
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TCS indicator
(Traction Control
System) (if equipped)
The TCS indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approxi-
mately 3 seconds. When the TCS is
on, it monitors the driving conditions
and under normal driving conditions,
the TCS light will remain off. When a
slippery or low traction condition is
encountered, the TCS will operate,
and the TCS indicator will blink to
indicate the TCS is operating.
TCS OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The TCS OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approxi-
mately 3 seconds. To switch to TCS
OFF mode, press the TCS button.
The TCS OFF indicator will illuminate
indicating the TCS is deactivated. If
this indicator stays on in the TCS ON
mode, the TCS may have a malfunc-
tion. Take your car to the authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
ESP indicator
(Electronic Stability
Program) (if equipped)
The ESP indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approxi-
mately 3 seconds. When the ESP is
on, it monitors the driving conditions
and under normal driving conditions,
the ESP light will remain off. When a
slippery or low traction condition is
encountered, the ESP will operate,
and the ESP indicator will blink to
indicate the ESP is operating.
TCS
TCS
OFF
ESP
443
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
ESP OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESP OFF indicator will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is
turned ON, but should go off after
approximately 3 seconds. To switch
to ESP OFF mode, press the ESP
button. The ESP OFF indicator will
illuminate indicating the ESP is deac-
tivated. If this indicator stays on in
the ESP ON mode, the ESP may
have a malfunction. Take your car to
the authorized Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
Safety belt warning chime
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned “ON”
or if it is disconnected after the key is
ON, the safety belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 6 sec-
onds.
Door ajar warning chime
(if equipped)
If a door is opened with the ignition
switch ON, the warning chime will
sound.
Key reminder warning chime
If the driver’s door is opened and the
ignition key is left in the ignition
switch in the LOCK or ACC position,
the key reminder warning chime will
sound. This is to prevent you from
locking your keys in the vehicle.
ESP
OFF
Driving your vehicle
444
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the small light when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parklight will
be turned off automatically if the
driver parks on the side of road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parklight position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
➀
OFF position
➁
Parklight position
➂
Headlight position
➃
Auto light position
Parklight position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
light position (1st position), the tail,
position, license and instrument
panel lights are ON.
LIGHTING
1GHA20531GHA2055A
445
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position (2nd position) the head,
tail, position, license and instrument
panel lights are ON.
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Never place anything over sensor
(
➀
) located on the instrument
panel, this will ensure better auto-
light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner, the cleanser may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the Auto light system
may not work properly.
1GHA2053A 1GHA2233A
Driving your vehicle
464
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
High - beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low-beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
Turn signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down. Green arrow indicators on the
instrument panel indicate which turn
signal is operating. They will self-
cancel after a turn is completed. If
the indicator continues to flash after
a turn, manually return the lever to
the OFF position.
1GHA2210A 2GHA20552GHA2211A
Right turn
Left turn
Left lane
change
Right lane
change
447
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Lane change signals
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position. The lever will return to the
OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out and will require replace-
ment.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical con-
nection in the circuit.
Automatic headlight aiming
(if equipped)
To provide better driver visibility and
reduce eye fatigue, the headlight
aiming (direction) is automatically
controlled depending on vehicle load
and vehicle angle (when vehicle is
loaded with passengers, cargo or
used for towing, the additional load
can alter the headlight aiming point
on the road surface). This system
provides constant automatic head-
light aiming under various vehicle
conditions and angles to ensure the
headlights are always pointed in the
right direction.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the automatic headlight aiming
system does not operate when the
vehicle is loaded with passengers
and the front portion of the vehicle
is at an elevated angle, or it is not
adjusting correctly, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an author-
ized Kia dealer. Do not attempt to
adjust the headlights manually,
damage to the automatic headlight
aiming system could occur.
Driving your vehicle
484
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility and avoid acci-
dents when visibility is poor due to
fog, rain or snow etc. The fog lights
will turn on when fog light switch (
➀
)
is turned to ON (
➁
) after the head-
light switch is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the
switch to OFF.
✽✽
NOTICE
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor or
unnecessary battery and generator
drain could occur.
1GHA2063
➀
➁
449
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently
at the same wiping intervals.
Use this mode in a light rain or
mist. To vary the speed set-
ting, turn the speed control
knob(
➀
). (S : slow operation,
F: fast operation)
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
: For a single wiping cycle, push
the lever forward and release it
with the lever in the OFF posi-
tion. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is
pushed upward and held.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield,
defrost the windshield for about 10
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice
is removed before using the wind-
shield wipers to ensure proper oper-
ation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
1GHA2056
Driving your vehicle
504
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Variable intermittent wipers
Set the lever to the INT position and
choose the desired wiper interval by
turning the ring.
One - touch wiper
For a single wiping cycle, push the
lever upward and release it with the
lever in the OFF position.
The wipers will operate continuously
if the lever is pushed upward and
held.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To prevent possible damage to the
wipers or windshield, do not oper-
ate the wipers when the wind-
shield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
1GHA2209 2GHA2056
451
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without 1st
warming the windshield with the
defrosters; the washer solution
could freeze on contact with the
windshield and obscure your
vision.
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 2-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
1GHA2210
Driving your vehicle
524
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the front
windshield and rear window, while
engine is running.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface
of the bottom of the front wind-
shield and the rear window, never
use sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, operate the defroster
only while the engine is running.
• The front windshield defroster is
designed to defrost wiper blades.
If you want to defrost and defog
on the front windshield, refer to
“Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging” in this section.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
console switch panel. The indicator
on the rear window defroster button
illuminates when the defroster is ON.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
front windshield defroster, it will be
operating at the same time when you
operate the rear window defroster.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after 20 minutes or
when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
DEFROSTER
1GHA2064
453
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
The hazard warning flasher causes
the rear tail lights and front turn sig-
nal lights to flash on and off, which
serves as a warning to other drivers
to exercise caution when approach-
ing or passing your vehicle.
To activate the flasher, depress the
hazard warning flasher switch. This
switch operates in any ignition switch
position.
To turn the flashers off, depress the
switch again.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
ESP
2GHA2051B
Driving your vehicle
544
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
2GHN2072/1GHA2223
1. Driver’s temperature control button
2. Front windshield defrost button
3. Rear window defrost button
4. Fan speed control button
5. Recirculated air position button
6. Outside (fresh) air position button
7. Passenger’s temperature control button
8. Dual temperature control selection button
9. Mode selection button
10. Air conditioning button
11. A/C display
12. OFF button
13. AUTO (automatic control) button
14. Rear climate control selection button
455
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Automatic operation
The automatic climate control sys-
tem is controlled by simply setting
the desired temperature.
The Full Automatic Temperature
Control (FATC) system automatically
controls the heating and cooling sys-
tem as follows;
1. Push the AUTO button. The indica-
tor light will come on and the
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by temperature set-
ting.
2. Push the TEMP button to set the
desired temperature.
If the temperature is set to the
lowest setting 62°F/17°C (Lo), the
air conditioning system will oper-
ate continuously.
3. To turn the automatic operation
off, press any button except tem-
perature control button. If you
press the mode selection button,
air-conditioning button, defrost
button, recirculated air position
button, outside (fresh) air position
button or fan speed button, the
selected function will be controlled
manually while other functions
operate automatically.
Regardless of the temperature set-
ting, when using automatic opera-
tion, the air conditioning system will
automatically turn on to decrease the
humidity inside the vehicle, even if
the temperature is set to warm.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sen-
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat-
ing and cooling system.
1GHA2074 1GHA2233
Driving your vehicle
564
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Manual operation
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually as well by
pushing buttons other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system
works sequentially according to the
order of buttons selected.
When pressing any button except
AUTO, the functions of the buttons
not selected will be controlled auto-
matically.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Temperature control button
The temperature will increase to the
maximum 90°F/32°C (HI) by pushing
the up button. Each push of the button
will cause the temperature to increase
by 1°F/0.5 °C.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum 62°F/17°C (Lo) by pushing
the down button. Each push of the but-
ton will cause the temperature to
decrease by 1°F/0.5°C. When set to
the lowest temperature setting, the air
conditioning will operate continuously.
Dual temperature control
selection button
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually (the indi-
cator light in the button illumi-
nates). Pressing the right tempera-
ture control button will automati-
cally switch to the DUAL mode as
well.
1GHA20792GHN2078
457
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
2. Press the left temperature control
to adjust the driver side tempera-
ture. Press the right temperature
control to adjust the passenger
side temperature.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode (the indi-
cator light in the button is off). The
passenger side temperature will
be set to the same as the driver
side temperature.
2. Press the left temperature control
button. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
will reset as Centigrade degrees.
This is normal condition and you can
switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows;
While depressing the MODE button,
depress the DUAL button for 3 sec-
onds or more. The display will
change from Centigrade to
Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
Driving your vehicle
584
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fan speed control button
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the
appropriate fan speed control button.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
Pressing the “OFF” button turns off
the fan.
- Low speed
- Medium speed
- High speed
- Maximum speed
Air intake control button
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air posi-
tion.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the button is
illuminated when the recirculated air
position button is depressed.
With the recirculated air position
selected, air from passenger com-
partment will be drawn through the
heating system and heated or cooled
according to the function selected.
1GHA2081 2GHN2080
459
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the button is
illuminated when the outside (fresh)
air position button is depressed.
With the outside (fresh) air position
selected, air enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or cooled
according to the function selected.
When starting the vehicle, the sys-
tem is automatically set to the out-
side (fresh) air position. Press the
button once to select the recirculated
air position.
✽✽
NOTICE
It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating in recircu-
lated air position will cause fogging
of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger
compartment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the “recirculated
air position” selected, will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
WARNING
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control
system operation in the
reciruclated air position can
cause drowsiness or sleepi-
ness, and loss of vehicle con-
trol. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion as much as possible
while driving.
2GHN2081
Driving your vehicle
604
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Mode selection button
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
2GHA2220A
2GHN2075
461
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
Face position
Air flow is directed toward
the upper body and face.
Additionally, each outlet can
be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the out-
let. (outlet port: )
Face - floor position
Air flow is directed towards
the face and the floor. The
air to the floor is warmer
than the air to the face
(except when the tempera-
ture control is set to the
extreme cold position).
(outlet port: , , )
Floor position
Most of the air flow is direct-
ed to the floor, with a small
amount of the air being
directed to the windshield
and side window defroster.
(outlet port: , , , )
Floor - defrost position
Most of the air flow is direct-
ed to the floor and the wind-
shield with a small amount
directed to the side window
defrosters.
(outlet port: , , , )
The air conditioning will
automatically operate based
on the ambient temperature
and outside(fresh) air posi-
tion will be selected auto-
matically.
Defrost button
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of
air directed to the side window
defrosters. (outlet port: , )
When the defrost button is pressed,
the outside (fresh) air position will
automatically be selected and air will
be discharged through the wind-
shield defrost vents. The air condi-
tioning will automatically operate
based on ambient temperature.
B
B
C
A
E
E
C
D
E
A
C D
1GHA2077
A
D
Driving your vehicle
624
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Instrument panel vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory,
check the instrument panel vents.
The outlet port ( ) can be opened or
closed separately using the vertical
thumbwheel.To close the vent, rotate
it upward to the maximum position.
To open the vent, rotate it downward.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
vertical or horizontal thumbwheels
as shown.
Air conditioning button
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF button
Push the OFF button to turn off the
air climate control system. However
you can still operate the mode, air
intake buttons as long as the ignition
switch is ON.
1GHA2076
B
1GHA2222 1GHA2258
463
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake to the desired air
position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake to the desired air
position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system
on.
• If cool air is desired at face level for
bi-level operation, set the mode to
the position.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
,
position.
Air conditioning
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R134a refrigerant which is not dam-
aging to the ozone layer.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the face position.
3. Set the air intake to the outside air
or recirculated air position.
4. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Driving your vehicle
644
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
• If warmer air is desired at floor
level for bi-level operation, set the
mode to the position and
adjust the temperature control to
maintain maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is
desired, set the temperature con-
trol to the Lo (62°F/17°C) and set
the air intake to the recirculated
air position, then set the fan
speed to the highest speed.
✽✽
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine
overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air condi-
tioning system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
Air conditioning system oper-
ation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
windows on rainy humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the
vehicle by operating the air condi-
tioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed at idle as the air condition-
ing compressor cycles on. This is
a normal system operation charac-
teristics.
465
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
• Use the air conditioning system
every month if only for a few min-
utes to ensure maximum system
performance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even pudding) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristics.
• The air conditioning system
includes a function that automati-
cally turns the air conditioning
compressor off if engine coolant
temperature approaches an over
heating level. The air conditioning
compressor operation will resume
once engine coolant temperature
returns to the normal range. Also,
the air conditioning compressor is
automatically turned off for a few
seconds when the accelerator is
fully depressed (wide open throt-
tle).
• When operating the air condition-
ing system use the outside (fresh)
air position.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
does provide maximum cooling,
however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Driving your vehicle
664
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
✽✽
NOTICE
When the performance of the air
conditioning system is reduced it is
important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the
compressor and abnormal system
operation may occur.
Item Type Amount
Refrigerant R-134a 22~24 oz. (625 ~ 675 g)
Compressor lubricant PAG(FD46XG) 8.5~9.8 in
3
(140 ~ 160 cc)
CAUTION
The air conditioning system
should be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer. Improper
service may cause serious
injury.
Air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
The system complies with SAE J-639.
467
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
The rear climate control system
allows the rear passengers to adjust
the temperature and airflow distribu-
tion using the control panel located
on the back of the center console,
facing the rear passenger compart-
ment. The rear climate control sys-
tem only operates when the front cli-
mate control system is on and, sup-
plements the functions of the front
climate control system for increased
rear passenger comfort.
Operating the rear climate control
system
To operate the rear climate control
system, perform the following:
1. Press the rear climate control
selection button in the front control
panel ( ) (the indicator light in
the button illuminates).
2. Turn the temperature control knob
located between the vents on the
rear control panel to adjust the
temperature. Turn the knob up
(RED mark) when warm air is
desired, or down (BLUE mark)
when cool air is desired.
Rear climate control
2GHA2223A 2GHN2225
Driving your vehicle
684
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3. Adjust the direction of the airflow
using the vent control lever.
2GHN2226
469
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving your vehicle
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected
ambient temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected.
If you don’t want the air-conditioning
or outside (fresh) air position, press
the corresponding button to cancel
the operation.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the or
position.
2. Set temperature to the extreme
hot (77~90°F / 25~32°C) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected
ambient temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected.
If you don’t want the air-conditioning
or outside (fresh) air position, press
the corresponding button to cancel
the operation.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING
Do not use defrost position dur-
ing cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the tempera-
ture of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility.
2GHN2229 2GHN2230
Driving your vehicle
704
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control button to the
hot position and the fan speed con-
trol button to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode selection button to the
floor- defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up inside of the wind-
shield.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fuel requirements / 5-2
Emission control system / 5-3
Before driving / 5-5
Suggestions for economical operation / 5-6
Special driving conditions / 5-7
Trailer towing / 5-13
Overloading / 5-20
Label information / 5-21
Homelink
®
wireless control system / 5-23
Driving tips
Driving tips
25
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Gasoline engine (unleaded)
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to
use only unleaded fuel with a mini-
mum Octane Rating of 87 Anti-
Knock Index (AKI).
✽✽
NOTICE
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control system’s
oxygen sensor and affect emission
control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what Kia has specified. (Consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer for details.)
Gasoline containing alcohol
and methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
53
Driving tips
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Consumer Information
Manual in your vehicle.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your Kia could affect
its performance, safety or durability
and may even violate governmental
safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
Engine exhaust gas precau-
tions (carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately by an authorized Kia
dealer or other competent repair
shop. If you ever suspect exhaust
fumes are coming into your vehi-
cle, drive it only with all the win-
dows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately by an authorized Kia
dealer. If you ever suspect exhaust
fumes are coming into your vehi-
cle, drive it only with all the win-
dows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poison-
ing.
Driving tips
45
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engine (unleaded).
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by a
qualified technician.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your
vehicle. Do not park the vehicle
over or near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
55
Driving tips
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle:
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in Section 7,
Maintenance.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
- Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Drunk driving is the num-
ber one contributor to the high-
way death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink and drive.
If you are drinking or taking
drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been
drinking or taking drugs.
Choose a designated driver or
call a cab.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
drunk.
Driving tips
65
SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many kilometers (miles) you can get
from a liter (gallon) of fuel.To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling.
Once the engine is running
smoothly, begin driving.
Remember, engine warm-up may
take a little longer on cold days.
• Save fuel by accelerating slowly
after stopping.
• Keep the engine in tune and follow
the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule. This will increase
the life of all parts and lower your
operating costs.
• Do not use the air conditioner
unnecessarily.
• Slow down when driving on rough
roads.
• For longer tire life and better fuel
economy, always keep the tires
inflated to the recommended pres-
sures.
• Maintain a safe distance from other
vehicles to avoid sudden stops.
This will reduce wear on brake lin-
ings and pads. Driving in such a
way will also save fuel because
extra fuel is required to accelerate
back to driving speed.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight
in the vehicle.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
needless wear, possible damage
to the brakes, and poor fuel econo-
my.
• Improper wheel alignment results
in faster tire wear and lower fuel
economy.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING - Engine off
during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function without the engine
running. Instead, downshift to
an appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
57
Driving tips
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in brak-
ing or steering.
• When braking, pump the brake
pedal with a light up-and-down
motion until the vehicle is stopped.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transaxle.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slip-
pery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
Driving tips
85
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged rocking may cause engine
over-heating, transaxle damage or
failure, and tire damage.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
- Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat, explode
and injure bystanders.
59
Driving tips
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Winter driving
• We recommend that you carry
emergency equipment, including
tire chains, a window scraper,
windshield de-icer, a bag of sand
or salt, flares, a small shovel and
jumper cables.
• Make sure you have sufficient eth-
ylene-glycol coolant in the radiator.
• Check the battery condition and
cables. Cold temperatures reduce
the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in excellent condition to
provide enough winter starting
power.
• Make sure the engine oil viscosity
is suitable for cold weather.
• Check the ignition system for loose
connections and damage.
• Use antifreeze-formulated wind-
shield washer fluid. (Do not use
engine coolant antifreeze.)
• Do not use the parking brake if it
might freeze. When parking, shift
to P (Park) with an automatic
transaxle and block the rear
wheels.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driving tips
105
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your Kia,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels, snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Install them only on the front tires.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
- Snow tire
size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
1GHA2135
511
Driving tips
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear the chains contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains
are the correct size and type
for your tires. Incorrect snow
chains can cause damage to
the vehicle body and suspen-
sion and may not be covered
by your vehicle manufacturer
warranty. Also, the snow chain
connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting
vehicle components causing
the snow chains to come
loose from the tire. Make sure
the snow chains are SAE
class “S” certified. Cable-type,
or plastic-type snow chain can
also be used.
• Always check chain installa-
tion for proper mounting after
driving approximately 0.5 to 1
km to ensure safe mounting.
Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
WARNING
When mounting snow chains,
park the vehicle on level ground
away from traffic. Turn on the
vehicle Hazard Warning flashers
and place a triangular emer-
gency warning device behind
the vehicle if available. Always
place the vehicle in park (P),
apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before
installing snow chains.
WARNING
- Tire chains
• The use of chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30
km/h) or the chain manufac-
turer’s recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
• Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Driving tips
125
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
HLA (Hydraulic Lash Adjuster)
noise
The engine HLA's keep the gap
between the valve and cam at zero
regardless of the valve expansion.
Occasionally, you may hear a tempo-
rary or continuous sound (clatter)
from the engine when starting or
idling. This noise will usually go away
by following a few simple steps:
If the temporary sound occurs when
starting a cold engine:
This is a normal condition. This
sound will disappear after the engine
oil has reached normal operating
pressure.
If the sound occurs when starting the
engine after the engine has not been
operated for more than 48 hours; or
engine has been cranked excessively:
This condition may be caused by oil
draining from the HLA's. This allows
air to enter the HLA causing insuffi-
cient lubricating oil in the HLA. This
will usually disappear within 15 min-
utes with the engine running at
2000~3000 rpm. If the sound does
not disappear, have the engine oil
pressure, engine lubrication system
and HLA's inspected by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CAUTION
Do not run the engine at more
than 3000 rpm until the noise
goes away. Damage to the
HLA's could occur.
513
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TRAILER TOWING
✽✽
NOTICE
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section. Remember that
trailering is different than just driving
your vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, durabil-
ity, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
WARNING
- Towing a
trailer
If you don't use the correct
equipment and drive properly,
you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes
may not work well - or even at
all. You and your passengers
could be seriously or fatally
injured. Pull a trailer only if you
have followed all the steps in
this section.
Item Specification
Maximum trailer Without trailer brakes 1000 (453)
weight lbs. (kg) With trailer brakes 2000 (907)
Driving tips
145
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
blies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This addi-
tional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• After your odometer indicates 500
miles (800 km) or more, you can
tow a trailer. For the first 500 miles
(800 km) that you tow a trailer,
don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throt-
tle. This helps your engine and
other parts of your vehicle “wear” in
at the heavier loads.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (Less than 100 km/h).
• The important considerations have
to do with weight:
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than 2000
lbs. (907 kg) with trailer brakes. But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, alti-
tude, road grades, outside tempera-
ture and how much your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
515
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
cle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight. After you've loaded
your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they aren’t, you
may be able to correct them simply
by moving some items around in the
trailer.
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly car-
bon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
WARNING
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check
weights and loading at a com-
mercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer
can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Driving tips
165
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
mendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trail-
er. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1000
lbs. (453 kg) loaded, then it needs its
own brakes and they must be ade-
quate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake
system.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint your-
self with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a
good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working.This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
WARNING
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have properly
set up the brake system. This is
not a task for amateurs. Use an
experienced, competent trailer
shop for this work.
517
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before
you can return to your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sud-
den maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.You must also
check the lights every time you dis-
connect and then reconnect the
wires.
Driving tips
185
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
Your Authorized Kia Dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring har-
ness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 45
mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
If your trailer weighs more than 1000
lbs. (453 kg) and you have an auto-
matic transaxle, you should drive in
D (Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat buildup and extend the life of
your transaxle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 12%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant
temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat. If the
needle of the coolant temperature
gauge moves across the dial
towards “H” (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do so,
and allow the engine to idle until it
cools down. You may proceed once
the engine has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibil-
ity of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
CAUTION
Failure to use an approved trail-
er wiring harness could result in
damage to the vehicle electrical
system and/or personal injury.
519
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Parking on hills
Generally, you should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a
hill. People can be seriously or fatal-
ly injured, and both your vehicle and
the trailer can be damaged if they
begin a downhill trajectory.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here’s how to do
it:
1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift
into gear.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brakes until the
chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your
parking brake, and then shift to P
(Park) for an automatic transaxle.
5. Release the brakes.
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake
is not firmly set.
If you have left the engine run-
ning, the vehicle can move sud-
denly. You or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill
with a trailer attached could
cause serious injury or death,
should a down hill trajectory
happen.
Driving tips
205
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Maintenance when trailer tow-
ing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention include engine oil, automat-
ic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and
cooling system fluid. Brake condition
is another important item to frequent-
ly check. Each item is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you
find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review these sec-
tions before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
✽✽
NOTICE
Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur in
hot days or during uphill driving. If
the coolant gauge indicates over-
heating, switch off the A/C and stop
the vehicle in a safe area to cool
down the engine.
OVERLOADING
CAUTION
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle are on the manufactur-
er's label attached to the dri-
ver's door. Exceeding these rat-
ings can cause an accident or
vehicle damage. You can calcu-
late the weight of your load by
weighing the items (or people)
before putting them in the vehi-
cle. Be careful not to overload
your vehicle.
521
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
LABEL INFORMATION
There are several important labels
and identification numbers located
on your vehicle. The label locations
are identified in the illustrations fol-
lows:
Vehicle identification number
(VIN)
1GHA601 2GHA522
3GHA524
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
VIN label
VIN bar code
2GHA524
Vehicle certification label (MVSS label)
Driving tips
225
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Tire specification / pressure
label
3GHA523
523
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your new mirror comes with an inte-
grated HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, which allows you to pro-
gram the mirror to activate your
garage door(s), estate gate, home
lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various
existing transmitters.
CAUTION
• When programming the
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System, you may be operating
a garage door or gate opera-
tor. Make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of
the moving door or gate to
prevent potential harm or
damage.
• Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks
the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by federal
safety standards. (This
includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot
detect an object, signaling the
door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safe-
ty standards. Using a garage
door opener without these
features increases risk of seri-
ous injury or death. For more
information, call 1-800-355-
3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Retain the original transmitter
for future programming proce-
dures (i.e., new vehicle pur-
chase). It is also suggested
that upon the sale of the vehi-
cle, the programmed
HomeLink buttons be erased
for security purposes (follow
step 1 in the “Programming”
portion of this text).
MMSA5007
Homelink buttons
Glare detection sensor
Indicator light
Driving tips
245
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC posi-
tion for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be
replaced in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radio-
frequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:
1. When programming the buttons
for the first time, press and hold
the left and center buttons ( ,
) simultaniously until the
indicator light begins to flash after
approximately 20 seconds. (This
procedure erases the factory-set
default codes. Do Not perform this
step to program additional hand-
held transmitters.)
✽✽
NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door open-
ers, follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please
follow the Canadian Programming
section.
For help with determining whether
your garage is non-rolling code or
rolling code, please refer to the
garage door openers owner’s manu-
al or contact HomeLink customer
service at 1-800-355-3515.
MMSA5005
Flashing
525
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to train
and the button on the transmitter
while the transmitter is approximate-
ly 1 to 3 inches away from the mirror.
Do not release the buttons until step
3 has been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)
✽✽
NOTICE
Some gate operators and garage
door openers may require you to
replace step #3 with the “cycling”
procedure noted in the “Canadian
Programming” section of this docu-
ment.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped devices)
with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing
the “Programming” portion of this
text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker
& easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” but-
ton on the device’s motor head
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating
the “learn” or “smart” button, refer-
ence the device’s owner’s manual
or contact HomeLink at 1-800-
355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 sec-
onds to complete step number 6.
MMSA5006
Flashing
Transmitter
1-3inches
Driving tips
265
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink button up to
three times. The rolling code
equipped device should now rec-
ognize the HomeLink signal and
activate when the HomeLink but-
ton is pressed. The remaining two
buttons may now be programmed
if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the “Programming”
portion of this text.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the pro-
grammed HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, securi-
ty system, entry door lock, estate
gate, or home or office lighting). For
convenience, the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device may also be used
at any time. The HomeLink Wireless
Controls System (once programmed)
or the original hand-held transmitter
may be used to activate the device
(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
Erasing programmed
HomeLink buttons
To erase the three programmed but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be
erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaniously, until the
indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time.
MMSA5005
Flashing
527
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink
using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button (or press and
“cycle” - as described in
“Canadian Programming” above).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be
activated by pushing the HomeLink
button that has just been pro-
grammed. This procedure will not
affect any other programmed
HomeLink buttons.
Gate operator programming &
canadian programming
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the HomeLink button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the
“Programming” portion of this text)
while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
✽✽
NOTICE
If programming a garage door open-
er or gate, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process
to prevent possible motor burn-up.
Accessories
If you would like additional informa-
tion on the HomeLink Wireless
Control System, HomeLink compati-
ble products, or to purchase other
accessories such as the HomeLink®
Lighting Package, please contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
This device complies with FCC rules
part 15. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harm-
ful interference.
(2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received
including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Driving tips
285
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
The transmitter has been tested
and complies with FCC and
DOC/MDC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate
the device.
IC: 4112104541A Gentex
MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Road warning / 6-2
Overheating / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
Electrical circuit protection / 6-7
Towing / 6-15
If you have a flat tire / 6-20
In case of an emergency
In case of an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle. It should be used when-
ever emergency repairs are being
made or when the vehicle is stopped
near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ESP
2GHA2051B
63
In case of an emergency
OVERHEATING
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss
of power, or if you hear a loud knock-
ing or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated. Should any of
these symptoms occur, use the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flash-
er, then drive to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle; set
the automatic transaxle in P (Park)
and apply the parking brake.
2. Make sure the air conditioner is
off.
3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of
the radiator, stop the engine and
call an Authorized Kia Dealer for
assistance.
If coolant is not boiling out, allow
the engine to idle and open the
hood to permit the engine to cool
gradually.
If the temperature does not go
down with the engine idling, stop
the engine and allow sufficient
time for it to cool.
4. The coolant level should then be
checked. If the level in the reser-
voir is low, look for leaks at the
radiator hoses and connections,
heater hoses and connections,
radiator, and water pump. If you
find a major leak or another prob-
lem that may have caused the
engine to overheat, do not operate
the engine until it has been cor-
rected. Call an Authorized Kia
Dealer for assistance. If you do not
find a leak or other problem, care-
fully add coolant to the reservoir.
If the engine frequently overheats,
have the cooling system checked
and repaired by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause seri-
ous injury.
In case of an emergency
46
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow the jump
starting procedures listed on page
6-6. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent
technician or towing service jump
start your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by use
of a 24-volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a 24-
volt motor generator set).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks
away from the battery.The bat-
tery produces hydrogen gas
which may explode if exposed
to flame or sparks.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
65
In case of an emergency
Connecting jumper cables
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1GHA401
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
In case of an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles
to touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the pre-
vious illustration. First connect one
end of a jumper cable to the posi-
tive terminal of the discharged bat-
tery (
➀
), then connect the other
end to the positive terminal on the
booster battery (
➁
). Proceed to
connect one end of the other
jumper cable to the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery (
➂
),
then the other end to a solid, sta-
tionary, metallic point (for exam-
ple, the engine lifting bracket)
away from the battery (
➃
). Do not
connect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is
cranked. Do not connect the
jumper cable from the negative
terminal of the booster battery to
the negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery terminals or the cor-
rect ground. Do not lean over the
battery when making connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
Refer to illustration on page 6-5.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CAUTION
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
67
In case of an emergency
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION
Fuses
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has two fuse panels,
one located in the driver's side knee
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
Two kinds of fuses are used: stan-
dard for lower amperage rating and
main for higher amperage ratings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MMSA6003
Standard
Main fuse
Normal
Normal
Blown
Blown
In case of an emergency
86
Fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
on the main fuse box in the engine
compartment.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the radio or room
lamp fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1GHA402 1GHA403A
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire instead of
the proper fuse - even as a
temporary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
• Do not use a screwdriver or
any other metal object to
remove fuses because it may
cause a short circuit and dam-
age the system.
Driver - side knee bolster
69
In case of an emergency
To check the fuse or relay in the
engine compartment, remove the
engine compartment shroud.
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by
removing the bolt on the cover and
unhooking the tab on one end and
tilting the cover back toward the
other end.
3. Check the fuses. If one is blown,
replace it with a new one of the
same rating.
✽✽
NOTICE
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
Main fuse
If the BATT (60A) or ALT (140A) fuse
are blown, it must be removed as fol-
lows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the screws shown in the
picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1GHA404
1GHA411
1GHA405
Engine compartment
➀
➁
➂
➀
Junction Box
➁
Main Fuse
➂
Relay Box
In case of an emergency
106
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Relay panel description
* For Canadian model
ETS
H/LAMP
(LO-RH)
DRL*
(TAIL)
DRL*
(RESISTOR)
H/LP
WASHER*
Passenger-side panel
Engine compartment
2GHN601/2GHN602
Relay name Relay description
Passenger - side panel
BLOWER (HI) Air conditioner blower relay (high)
Engine compartment
H/LP WASHER* Head lamp washer relay
ETS Electronic throttle system relay
DRL (RESISTOR)* Daytime running light (Resistor) relay
DRL (TAIL)* Daytime running light (Taillight) relay
H/LAMP (LO-RH) Headlight relay (low beam-right)
611
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
C/FAN
20A
FUSE
PULLER
P/SEAT(FR)
30A
H/
LP
(LO-LH)
HORN
START
IGN SW-2
30A
R/FAN
30A
R/FAN
A/CON FAN-2
WIPER (LO)
TAIL
LP
H/
LP
(HI)
A/CON FAN-1
FOG
LP
(FR)
FUEL PUMP
A/CON
16
27
38
11 12 16 20
15
14
17
18
22
23
19
25
24
27
2113
9
10
4
5
28
26
IGN SW-1
30A
ABS 2
30A
ABS 1
30A
1. FUEL PUMP
2. H/LP (LO-LH)
3. ABS
4. INJECTOR
5. A/CON COMP
6. ATM RLY
7. ECU RLY
8. IGN COIL
9. O2 SNSR
10. ENG SNSR
(20A)
(15A)
(10A)
(10A)
(10A)
(20A)
(20A)
(20A)
(15A)
(15A)
11. HORN
12. TAIL LP
13. H/LP WASHER
14. ETS
15. FOG LP (FR)
16. H/LP (HI)
17. SPARE
18. SPARE
19. SPARE
20. SPARE
(15A)
(20A)
(20A)
(20A)
(15A)
(15A)
(30A)
(20A)
(15A)
(10A)
21. BLOWER MTR
22. S/WARMER
23. AMP
24. DRL
25. H/LP (LO-RH)
26. P/FUSE-1
27. ECU
28. ECS
NOT USED
(30A)
(30A)
(20A)
(15A)
(15A)
(30A)
(10A)
(15A)
USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE AND RELAY ONLT.
Engine compartment
10A
B/ALARM
15A
A/BAG
20A
C/LIGHTER
10A
S/WARMER
20A
P/WDW(RH)
15A
P/HANDLE
15A
T/SIG LP
30A
HTD GLASS
15A
TRUNK OPEN
SHUNT CONN
USE ONLY DESIGNATED FUSE ONLY
POWER/CONN
15A
STOP LP
10A
MIRROR HTD
10A
LAN UNIT
10A
B/ALARM
10A
DR LP
15A
AV.CLOCK
30A
P/SEAT(RR)
10A
BACK WARN'G
10A
ROOM LP
15A
F/LID OPEN
10A
TAIL LP(RH)
10A
TAIL LP(LH)
15A
FOG LP(RR), PIC
20A
P/WDW(LH)
10A
EPS
10A
CURTAIN(RR)
10A
A/CON
20A
WIPER(FR)
10A
LAN UNIT
10A
H/LP
10A
CLOCK
20A
P/OUTLET
10A
T/REDUCER
10A
AV
10A
A/BAG IND
10A
B/UP LP
10A
CLUSTER
10A
ENG SNSR
10A
TRIP COMPUTER
2GHN603/2GHN604
Driver-side knee bolster
In case of an emergency
126
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
* For Canadian model
Description Fuse rating Protected component
1 FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel pump
2 H/LP (LO-LH) 15A Headlight (low-left)
3 ABS 10A Anti-lock brake system
4 INJECTOR 10A Injector
5 A/CON COMP 10A Air-conditioner compressor
6 ATM RLY 20A Automatic transaxle control relay
7 ECU RLY 20A Engine control unit relay
8 IGN COIL 20A Ignition coil
9 O2 SNSR 15A Oxygen sensor
10 ENG SNSR 15A
Power train control system sensors
11 HORN 15A Horn
12 TAIL LP 20A Tail light
13 H/LP WASHER 20A Headlight washer
14 ETS 20A Electronic throttle system
15 FOG LP (FR) 15A Fog light (front)
16 H/LP (HI) 15A Headlight (high)
17 SPARE 30A spare fuse
18 SPARE 20A spare fuse
19 SPARE 15A spare fuse
20 SPARE 10A spare fuse
21 BLOWER MTR 30A Blower motor
22 S/WARMER 30A Seat warmer
23 AMP 20A Radio amplifier
24 DRL* 15A Daytime running light
Description Fuse rating Protected component
25 H/LP (LO-RH) 15A Headlight (low beam-right)
26 P/FUSE-1 30A All electrical system
27 ECU 10A Engine control unit
28 ECS 15A Electronic control suspension
NOT USED Not used
C/FAN 20A Condenser fan
P/SEAT (FR) 30A Power seat (front)
IGN SW-1 30A Ignition switch
ABS 2 30A Anti-lock brake system
ABS 1 30A Anti-lock brake system
IGN SW-2 30A Ignition switch
R/FAN 30A Radiator fan
H/LP (LO-LH) - Headlight relay (low beam-left)
FUEL PUMP - Fuel pump relay
HORN - Horn relay
START - Start motor relay
A/CON - Air conditioner relay
A/CON FAN-1 - Air conditioner fan relay
H/LP (HI) - Headlight relay (high beam)
R/FAN - Radiator fan relay
FOG LP (FR) - Fog light relay (front)
TAIL LP - Taillight relay
WIPER (LO) - Wiper relay (low)
A/CON FAN-2 - Air conditioner fan relay
Engine compartment
613
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Driver-side knee bolster
Description Fuse rating Protected component
B/ALARM 10A Burglar alarm
A/BAG 15A Air bag
C/LIGHTER 20A Cigar lighter
S/WARMER 10A Seat warmer
P/WDW(RH) 20A Power window (right)
P/HANDLE 15A Power steering wheel
T/SIG LP 15A Turn signal light
HTD GLASS 30A Defroster
TRUNK OPEN 15A Trunk lid opener
CLUSTER 10A Cluster
A/BAG IND 10A Air bag indicator
P/OUTLET 20A Electrical power socket
LAN UNIT 10A Lan unit
CURTAIN(RR) 10A Electric curtain (rear)
FOG LP(RR), PIC 15A Fog light (rear), Personal identifi-
cation card
F/LID OPEN 15A Fuel filler lid opener
P/SEAT(RR) 30A Power seat (rear)
B/ALARM 10A Burglar alarm
STOP LP 15A Stop light
TRIP COMPUTER 10A Trip computer
B/UP LP 10A Back-up light
AV 10A Audio
H/LP 10A Headlight
Description Fuse rating Protected component
A/CON 10A Air-conditioning system
P/WDW(LH) 20A Power window (left)
TAIL LP(RH) 10A Taillight (right)
BACK WARN’G 10A Back warning
DR LP 10A Door courtesy lamp
MIRROR HTD 10A Outside review mirror defroster
ENG SNSR 10A
Power train control system sensors
T/REDUCER 10A Seat belt tension reducer
CLOCK 10A Clock
WIPER(FR) 20A Wiper (front)
EPS 10A Electronic power steering
TAIL LP(LH) 10A Tail light (left)
ROOM LP 10A Room lamp
AV, CLOCK 15A Audio, Clock
LAN UNIT 10A Lan unit
SHUNT CONN - Switch illumination
POWER/CONN - Power connector
In case of an emergency
146
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Power connector
Your vehicle is equipped with a
power connector to prevent battery
discharge if your vehicle is parked
without being operated for prolonged
periods. Use the following proce-
dures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged period.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail
lights.
3. Open the driver-side knee bolster
cover and pull up the
“POWER/CONN”.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the power connector is pulled up
from the fuse panel, the warning
chime, AV system, clock and
intetrior lamps, etc., will not oper-
ate. Some items must be reset after
replacement. (Refer to “Items to
be reset···.” on page 7-36)
• Even though the power connector
is pulled up, the battery can still
be discharged by operation of the
headlights or other electrical
devices.
1GHA403
Power
connector
615
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TOWING
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause damage
to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
2GHA4107
2GHA4106
2GHA4108 2GHA4109
In case of an emergency
166
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
✽✽
NOTICE
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing)
2GHN4101
Tie-down hook
CAUTION
Do not use the hooks under the
front of the vehicle for towing
purposes. These hooks are
designed ONLY for transport tie-
down. If the tie-down hooks are
used for towing, the tie-down
hooks will be damaged and this
could lead to serious injury.
617
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Towing with a vehicle other
than a tow truck
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
Authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front or rear of the
vehicle. Use extreme caution when
towing the vehicle. A driver must be
in the vehicle to steer it and operate
the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
2GHN4102
• Front
1GHA417A
• Rear
In case of an emergency
186
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
✽✽
NOTICE
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the cable
or chain to the towing hook pro-
vided.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
• Use a towing strap less than 16
feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or
red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and
towing cable or chain. The hook
and towing cable or chain may
break and cause serious injury
or damage.
• If the towing vehicle can hard-
ly move, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact an
Authorized Kia dealer or a
commercial tow truck service
for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
1GHA4107
619
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
When your vehicle is being
towed by another vehicle
other than a tow truck (In case
of an emergency)
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Vehicle equipped with automatic
transaxles should not exceed 28
mph (45 km/h) and should not be
towed more than 50 miles (80 km).
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent internal damage to the
transaxle, never tow your vehicle
from the rear (backwards) with all
four tires in contact with the sur-
face.
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle
The following methods are effective
when your vehicle is stuck in mud,
sand or similar substances that pre-
vent the vehicle from being driven
out under its own power.
• Remove the soil and sand, etc.
from the front and the back of the
tires.
• Place a stone or wood under the
tires.
In case of an emergency
206
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
The spare tire, jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spanner
are stored in the trunk compartment.
Move the carpeting out of the way to
reach this equipment.
The jack assembly is located in the
trunk, under the carpeting, in the
right-hand corner.
Removing the spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
1GHA406 1GHA407
621
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Tire replacement
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park).
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
WARNING - Changing
tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground
whenever possible. If you can-
not find a firm, level place off
the road, call a towing service
company for assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never use
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jack support.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack ;
use vehicle support stands.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
2GHA4102
In case of an emergency
226
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Wrap a piece of cloth around the
tip of the screwdriver to avoid
scratching.
7. Insert a screwdriver into the notch
of the wheel cover and pry gently
to remove the wheel cover.
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully, and
always block the wheel diago-
nally opposite the wheel being
changed.
• It is recommended that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
should remain in a vehicle that
is being jacked.
1GHA408 2GHN409
623
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
9. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
10. Insert the jack handle into the
jack and turn it clockwise, raising
the vehicle until the tire just
clears the ground. This measure-
ment is approximately 1.2 in (30
mm). Before removing the wheel
lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is
stable and that there is no
chance for movement or slip-
page.
11. Remove the wheel lug nuts by
turning them counterclockwise,
then remove the wheel.
12. Mount the spare tire into position
and install the wheel lug nuts
with the beveled edge inward.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
1GHA41041GHA41032GHN409B
In case of an emergency
246
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13. Once the wheel lug nuts have
been tightened, lower the vehicle
fully to the ground and continue to
tighten the lug nuts until they are
fully secured. Tighten the wheel
lug nuts firmly in a “star” pattern.
If you are unsure of the tightness
of the wheel lug nuts, have them
checked at the nearest service
station. The specified tightening
torque is 65-79 lb•ft (9~11 kg•m,
88-107 N•m). Improperly tight-
ened wheel lug nuts could cause
brake pedal vibration while brak-
ing.
14. Reinstall the wheel cover by fit-
ting the boss of the wheel cover
in the groove of the wheel.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut, wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
2GHN409A
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts
removed are reinstalled - or, if
replaced, that nuts with metric
threads and the same chamfer
configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a colli-
sion.
WARNING
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Maintenance services / 7-3
Normal maintenance schedule / 7-5
Severe maintenance schedule / 7-8
Owner maintenance / 7-11
Engine compartment / 7-14
Engine oil and oil filter / 7-15
Engine cooling system / 7-18
Brakes / 7-21
Parking brake / 7-22
Drive belts / 7-23
Power steering / 7-24
Steering wheel / 7-25
Automatic transaxle / 7-25
Lubricants and fluids / 7-28
Air cleaner / 7-29
Air conditioner air filter / 7-30
Wiper blades / 7-32
Battery / 7-34
Tires and wheels / 7-37
Bulb replacement / 7-44
Lubricant specifications / 7-51
Exterior care / 7-53
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Interior care / 7-57
Maintenance
Maintenance
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an Authorized
Kia Dealer perform this work.
An Authorized Kia Dealer has facto-
ry-trained technicians and genuine
Kia parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and qual-
ity service, see an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your Kia warranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
Authorized Kia Dealer. An Authorized
Kia Dealer meets Kia`s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Maintenance
47
Scheduled maintenance serv-
ice
If none of the following conditions are
applicable, then use Schedule 1 –
Normal Maintenance.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C)
However, if any of the preceding con-
ditions apply, follow Schedule 2 –
Severe Maintenance.
After 105 months or 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) continue to follow the
prescribed maintenance intervals.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
75
Maintenance
SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
(km x 1,000)
(12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168)
Drive belts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Auto transaxle fluid I I I I I I R
Engine timing belt
I R(1) I
Air cleaner element R R R
Spark plugs R
Water pump Inspect when replacing the timing belt
Engine coolant*
1)
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
(1) For California, this maintenance is recommended, but not required.
*1) Coolant level adjustment and leak : Inspect regularly.
Replace every 24 months or 30,000 miles
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Maintenance
67
SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
(km x 1,000)
(12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168)
Fuel filter R R
Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Vaccum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Fuel tank air filter I R I R I R I
Battery condition I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I
Brake pedal Inspect frequently depending on the condition
Parking brake I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid I I I I I I I
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
77
Maintenance
SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
(km x 1,000)
(12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168)
Power steering fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation, linkage and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints L L L
Drive shaft and boots Inspect every 12 months or 15,000 miles
Tire Please refer to section “Tires and wheels” on page 7-37
II IIII IIIIIIII
Chassis/body nuts and bolts I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
Air conditioner refrigerant Inspect refrigerant amount annually
Air conditioner compressor Inspect operation annually
Air conditioner air filter Replace every 10,000 miles
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
L: Lubricate
Pressure
Tread wear
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Maintenance
87
SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
(km x 1,000)
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) (104) (112)
Drive belts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine oil Replace every 3 months or 3,000 miles
Engine oil filter Replace every 3 months or 3,000 miles
Auto transaxle fluid I R I R
Engine timing belt
I R(1) I
Air cleaner element Inspect more frequently depending on the condition and if necessary, replace
Spark plugs Inspect more frequently depending on the condition and if necessary, replace
Water pump Inspect when replacing the timing belt
Engine coolant*
1)
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
(1) For California, this maintenance is recommended, but not required.
*1) Coolant level adjustment and leak : Inspect regularly.
Replace every 24 months or 30,000 miles
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
79
Maintenance
SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
(km x 1,000)
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) (104) (112)
Fuel filter Replace every 37,500 miles
Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Vaccum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Fuel tank air filter I R I R
Battery condition I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal Inspect frequently depending on the condition
Parking brake I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Maintenance
107
SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
(km x 1,000)
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) (104) (112)
Power steering fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation, linkage and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints L L L
Drive shaft and boots Inspect every 6 months or 7,500 miles
Tire Please refer to section “Tires and wheels” on page 7-37
II IIII IIIIIIII
Chassis/body nuts and bolts I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
Air conditioner refrigerant Inspect refrigerant amount annually
Air conditioner compressor Inspect operation annually
Air conditioner air filter Replace every 10,000 miles
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
Pressure
Tread wear
711
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Owner maintenance schedule
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or qualified
service technician at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er or qualified service technician or
service advice as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for strange sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system after use is
normal).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow out
under pressure. This could
cause serious injury.
Maintenance
127
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the coolant
recovery reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or da-
mage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system
before the warm weather season.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
713
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by a qualified service technician with
special tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Kia Warranty &
Consumer Information Manual pro-
vided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or main-
tenance procedure, have it done by
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be danger-
ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
maintenance procedures. If
you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by a quali-
fied technician.
• Working under the hood with
the engine running is danger-
ous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury. Therefore, if you must
run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and sim-
ilar loose clothing before get-
ting near the engine or cool-
ing fans.
Maintenance
147
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1GHA411
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Auto transaxle oil dipstick
5. Air cleaner
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Radiator cap
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Engine coolant reservoir
11. Negative battery terminal
715
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants”
later in this section.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Change engine oil and filter accord-
ing to the Scheduled Maintenance at
the beginning of this section.
1GHA50011GHA5002
Maintenance
167
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1. Warm the engine up for a few min-
utes and then turn it off. Remove
the oil filler cap.
2. Drain the oil into a suitable con-
tainer by removing the oil drain
plug.
3. Remove the engine oil filter with
an oil filter wrench.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not allow the oil filter gasket to
remain on the oil filter mounting
surface. This will cause oil leakage
and engine damage. Remove the old
gasket completely so that a new gas-
ket may be properly seated.
4. Use a clean rag to clean the oil fil-
ter mounting surface on the
engine.
5. Apply a small amount of engine oil
to the new oil filter O-ring seal.
6. Install the oil filter and tighten it.
(Refer to the oil filter caution label
for tightening instructions.)
7. Install a new washer on the drain
plug. Don’t use an old washer
repeatedly.
8. Replace the drain plug after the oil
has thoroughly drained.Torque the
plug to 26~32 lb•ft (3.5~4.5 kg•m,
35~44 N•m).
9. Refill the engine with new oil to the
F mark on the dipstick. Do not
overfill.
10. Reinstall the oil filler cap secure-
ly.
11. Start the engine and inspect
around the oil filter seal for leaks.
Stop the engine.
12. Check the oil level and fill to the F
mark as necessary.
PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if left
in contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap and
warm water as soon as possible
after handling used oil.
CAUTION
• Both the oil and engine are
hot. Do not burn yourself.
• Keep all engine oil out of the
reach of children.
717
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Oil capacity
With filter change :
4.5 US qt. (4.3 liters)
Without filter change :
4.2 US qt. (4.0 liters)
Use only the specified Service
Grade engine oil. (Refer to
“Recommended Lubricants” later in
this section.)
✽✽
NOTICE
• Although oil filters may have the
same external appearance, their
internal designs differ significant-
ly. These filters are not inter-
changeable. To avoid potential
engine damage, use only the speci-
fied filter. Consult an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
• Follow these instructions careful-
ly. An improper oil filter installa-
tion can cause oil leakage and
engine damage. Drained engine oil
should be disposed of properly,
according to local environmental
protection agency codes. It should
not be thrown down the drain or
in the trash.
Maintenance
187
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Even then,
use extreme care when
removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it,
and turn it counterclockwise
slowly to the first stop. Step
back while the pressure is
released from the cooling sys-
tem. When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not oper-
ating, do not remove the radi-
ator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and steam
may still blow out under pres-
sure, causing serious injury.
719
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the level
gauge attached to the coolant reser-
voir cap when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not over-
fill. If frequent additions are required,
see an Authorized Kia Dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Changing coolant
Change coolant according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
• Use only soft (de-mineralized)
water in the coolant mixture.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
2GHA5003
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Coolant
Solution
Water
Maintenance
207
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1. Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise to remove it.
2. Loosen the radiator drain plug and
drain the coolant into a suitable
container.
3. With the plug loose, flush the sys-
tem with running water.
4. Drain the system completely and
retighten the drain plug. Add the
necessary amount of ethylene-gly-
col based coolant and water to
provide the required protection
against freezing and corrosion. In
extremely cold climates, add ethyl-
ene-glycol based coolant in accor-
dance with the instructions of the
manufacturer.
5. Run the engine at idle with the
radiator cap off. Slowly add addi-
tional coolant as necessary.
6. At this point, wait until the engine
reaches normal operating temper-
ature. Depress the accelerator two
or three times; then add coolant as
required. Be careful not to burn
yourself.
7. Reinstall the radiator cap. Inspect
all connections for leaks and
recheck the coolant level in the
reservoir. Recheck again after a
few days and add coolant as nec-
essary.
1GHA50101GHA412
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause seri-
ous injury.
721
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BRAKES
Checking brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended
Lubricants” later in this section.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
1GHA422
WARNING
When changing and adding
brake fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact
with your eyes. If brake fluid
should come in contact with
your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of
fresh tap water. Have your eyes
examined by a doctor as soon
as possible.
WARNING
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of
fluid, the vehicle should be
inspected by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
1GHA5005
Maintenance
227
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 44 lb (20 kg,
196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
Stroke : 3.5~3.8 in (88~98 mm)
1GHA3011
PARKING BRAKE
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result. Brake
fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be thrown out. Don't put
in the wrong kind of fluid. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in your brake clutch
system can damage brake
clutch system parts.
723
Maintenance
DRIVE BELTS
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted if necessary. At the same
time, belts should be examined for
cracks, wear, fraying or other evi-
dence of deterioration and replaced
if necessary.
Belt routing should also be checked
to be sure there is no interference
between the belts and other parts of
the engine. After a belt is replaced,
the new belt should be adjusted
again after two or three weeks to
eliminate slack resulting from initial
stretching after use.
Checking the compressor
drive belt
When the air conditioning is being
used regularly, the compressor drive
belt tension should be checked at
least once a month.
To check the drive belt tension, turn
the engnie off, press down on the
belt halfway between the engine
crankshaft and compressor pulleys.
Pressing with your finger, you should
not be able to deflect this belt any-
more than 1/3 of an inch. If you have
the instruments to check it, with a
force of 22 lb. (98N), the deflection
should be 0.315 inches (approx. 8.0
mm). If the belt is too loose, have it
adjusted by an authorized Kia
Dealer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2GHN722
Maintenance
247
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
POWER STEERING
Checking the power steering
fluid level
With the vehicle on level ground,
check the fluid level in the power
steering reservoir periodically. The
fluid should be between MAX and
MIN marks on the level gauge
attached to the cap.
Before adding power steering fluid,
thoroughly clean the area around the
reservoir cap to prevent power steer-
ing fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level.
In the event the power steering sys-
tem requires frequent addition of
fluid, the vehicle should be inspected
by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate the
vehicle for prolonged periods with
a low power steering fluid level.
• Never start the engine when the
reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Too little fluid can make the steer-
ing wheel heavier or strange noise
can be generated.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of
the power steering wheel and
cause damage to it.
Use only the specified power steer-
ing fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
Lubricants" later in this section.)
Power steering hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
severe damage and the twists in the
power steering hose before driving.
1GHA421
725
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
STEERING WHEEL
Park the vehicle on level ground,
start the car and place the tire
wheels in the straight-ahead posi-
tion. Turn the steering wheel to the
left and right with a little force and
check the free play until you get a
feel for resistance against the tire
wheels movement.
Standard value: 1.2 in (30 mm) or
less
✽✽
NOTICE
If the measured value exceeds the
standard value, have the system
checked by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Checking the automatic
transaxle fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level
should be checked regularly.
The volume of the transaxle fluid
changes with temperature. Although
it is best to check the level after hav-
ing driven the vehicle for at least 30
minutes, the level can be checked
after warming the fluid using the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground
and firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Allow the engine to idle for about 2
minutes.
3. Depress the brake pedal and
move the shift lever slowly through
all ranges then set it in P (Park).
4. With the engine still idling, pull out
the dipstick, wipe it clean and rein-
sert it fully.
5. Pull out the dipstick again and
check the fluid level.
1.2 in (30 mm)
2GHN5100 1GHA5004
Maintenance
267
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If the fluid has been warmed to nor-
mal operating temperature of approx-
imately 158~176°F (70~80°C), the
fluid level should be within “HOT”
range.
✽✽
NOTICE
“COLD” scale is for reference only
and should NOT be used to deter-
mine transaxle fluid level.
✽✽
NOTICE
New automatic transaxle fluid
should be red. The red dye is added
so the assembly plant can identify it
as automatic transaxle fluid and dis-
tinguish it from engine oil or
antifreeze. The red dye, which is not
an indicator of fluid quality, is not
permanent. As the vehicle is driven,
the automatic transaxle fluid will
begin to look darker. The color may
eventually appear light brown.
Therefore, have an Authorized Kia
dealer change the automatic
transaxle fluid according to the
Scheduled Maintenance at the
beginning of this section.
CAUTION
• Low fluid level causes
transaxle slippage. Overfilling
can cause foaming, loss of
fluid and transaxle malfunc-
tion.
• The use of a non-specified
fluid could result in transaxle
malfunction and failure.
WARNING - Parking brake
To avoid sudden movement of
the vehicle, apply parking brake
and depress the brake pedal
before moving the shift lever.
1GHA413
727
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Changing the automatic
transaxle fluid
1. Raise and suitably support the
vehicle.
2. Remove the drain plug located at
the bottom of the transaxle pan.
3. After the oil has drained complete-
ly, install a new washer on the
plug, reinstall the drain plug, and
tighten to 21~24 lb•in (290~340
kg•cm, 29~33 N•m).
4. Lower the vehicle.
5. Remove the automatic transaxle
dipstick located near the center of
the engine compartment bulkhead
and, using a funnel, add approxi-
mately 2 US quarts (2 liters) of
automatic transaxle fluid.
Use only the specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
"Recommended Lubricants" later in
this section.)
✽✽
NOTICE
Do NOT overfill the automatic
transaxle reservoir. Doing so can
cause a seal “blow out”, loss of fluid,
and damage to the transaxle. If you
overfill the reservoir, you must drain
the excess prior to driving the vehi-
cle. The transaxle will hold 2.5 US
qt. (2.5 liters) when completely
empty. However, it is likely that
there will be fluid left in the
transaxle after draining, especially if
the front of the vehicle was raised to
remove the drain plug.
6. Check the fluid level. If necessary,
add a small amount of fluid and
check the level again. Continue
this process until the level reads
within “HOT” range.
7. Replace the dipstick and properly
dispose of the used transaxle fluid.
WARNING - Lifting your
vehicle
If you raise your vehicle, always
ensure that it is supported at all
four jacking or lift points for the
vehicle. Only if this level of sup-
port is provided can you ensure
that the vehicle will remain sta-
ble and not fall off the jack
stands or other supports. If you
do not provide such support,
the vehicle may fall off the jack
stands, or other supports, caus-
ing serious injury or death.
Maintenance
287
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Body lubrication
All moving points of the body, such
as door hinges, hood hinges, and
locks, should be lubricated each time
the engine oil is changed. Use a non-
freezing lubricant on locks during
cold weather.
Make sure the engine hood second-
ary latch keeps the hood from open-
ing when the primary latch is
released.
1GHA421A
WARNING
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reser-
voir. Damage to the vehicle or
it's occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and ani-
mals. Do not drink and avoid
contacting windshield washer
fluid. Serious injury or death
could occur.
729
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
AIR CLEANER
Element replacement
A viscous paper air cleaner filter is
used. It must be replaced when nec-
essary, and should not be cleaned
and reused.
1. Remove the engine compartment
shroud on the air cleaner.
2. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner
housing with a clean, damp cloth.
4. Replace the air cleaner element.
We recommend that the air clean-
er element be replaced with gen-
uine Kia parts.
5. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
1GHA5012 1GHA414 1GHA415
Maintenance
307
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Replace the element according to
the Scheduled Maintenance Section.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
Severe Maintenance Schedule in
this section.)
AIR CONDITIONER AIR FILTER
The air conditioner air filter located
between the evaporator core and
blower filters the air coming into the
vehicle.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter for a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may be
decreased and the dust intake may
increase. Therefore the air filter
should be replaced at the intervals
shown in the maintenance schedule.
Especially if the vehicle is operated
in dusty or sandy areas, replace the
filter more often than the recom-
mended intervals.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box part way,
reach inside and pull out the elas-
tic line and push the retaining clip
through the hole in the rear of the
glove box. Allow the glove box to
open.
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• Driving without an air cleaner
encourages backfiring, which
could cause a fire in the
engine compartment.
• When removing the air cleaner
element, be careful that dust
or dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
1GHA416
1BLB505
Evaporator core
Blower
Outside air
Recirculated air
Air filter
Inside
vehicle
731
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2. With the glove box open, grasp
both sides of the glove box, push
inward on the stoppers and pull
them over the trim panel to allow
the glove box hang freely on the
hinges.
3. Pull the hooks under the air condi-
tioner air filter cover upwards and
remove the cover.
4. Replace the air conditioner filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the air conditioner
air filter install it according to the
“UP” and “DOWN” identification
marks. Otherwise, the system may
produce noise and the effectiveness
of the filter may be reduced.
1GHA418
UP
UP
UP
UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
2GHA419
1GHA417
Maintenance
327
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WIPER BLADES
Wiper blade maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other sol-
vents on or near them.
Windshield wiper blade
replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
✽✽
NOTICE
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
2GHN5101
733
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward; then
lift it off the arm.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield.
2. Firmly grasp the end of the rubber
blade and pull until the tabs are
free of the metal support.
3. Remove the metal retainers from
the rubber blade and install them
in the new rubber blade.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not bend the metal retainers.
MMSA7014 MMSA7015 MMSA7016
Plastic locking clip
Push
Tabs
Metal support
Pull out
Retainer
Retainer
Maintenance
347
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4. Carefully insert a new rubber
blade and install the blade assem-
bly in the reverse order of removal.
Install the blade with the tabs facing
towards the bottom of the wiper arm.
BATTERY
MMSA7017
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the follow-
ing instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
Hydrogen, which is a
highly combustible gas,
is always present in bat-
tery cells and may
explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to con-
tact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush your
eyes with clean water for
at least 15 minutes and
get immediate medical
attention. If possible,
continue to apply water
with a sponge or cloth
until medical attention is
received.
If electrolyte gets on
your skin, thoroughly
wash the contacted area.
If you feel a pain or a
burning sensation, get
medical attention imme-
diately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
(Continued)
735
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For best battery service :
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
CBGQ0705
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure on
the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in per-
sonal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to charge the
battery when the battery
cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Never touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or the ignition switched on.
Maintenance
367
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Items to be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Driver seat position memory sys-
tem (See page 3-34)
• Power window (See page 3-15)
• Clock (See page 3-106)
• Climate control system (See pages
4-59)
• Audio (See the audio manual)
• Sunroof (See page 3-110)
✽✽
NOTICE
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precau-
tions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes,
sparks, or flame near the bat-
tery.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery ter-
minal.
737
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tires care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Inflation pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked every day
when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”
means the vehicle has not been driv-
en for at least three hours or driven
less than one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the front driver’s door sill.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by 4
to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Underinflation results in excessive
wear, poor handling, reduced fuel
economy, and the possibility of
blowouts from overheated tires.
Also, low tire pressure can cause
poor sealing of the tire bead. If the
tire pressure is excessively low,
wheel deformation and/or tire sep-
aration is possible. So, keep your
tire pressures at the proper levels.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
(Continued)
3GHA523
WARNING
Severe underinflation (10 psi (70
kPa) or more) can lead to severe
heat build-up, especially on hot
days and when driving at high
speed. This can potentially
cause tread separation and
other tire irregularities to
appear that can result in the
loss of vehicle control leading
to severe injury or death.
Maintenance
387
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(Continued)
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, handling problems, excessive
wear at the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire infla-
tion valve caps. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leak-
age. If the cap have been lost,
install new one as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire
also if you can see fabric or cord.
After rotation, be sure to bring the
front and rear tire pressures to spec-
ification and check lug nut tightness.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and lead
to sudden tire failure.This could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CBGQ0706
CBGQ0707
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
With a full-size spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
739
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
Wheel alignment and tire
balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper wheel weights can dam-
age your vehicle's aluminum wheels.
Use only approved wheel weights.
2GHA5032
Tread wear indicator
Maintenance
407
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer calibration, head-
light aim and bumper height.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
WARNING
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial, bias-belted, and
bias-type tires. All four tires
should be of the same size,
design and construction. Use
only the tire sizes listed on the
Tire Label found below the
door striker on the driver’s
side. Make sure that all tires
and wheels are the same size
and have the same load-carry-
ing capacity. Use only tire and
wheel combinations recom-
mended on the Tire Label or
by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
Failure to follow these precau-
tions can adversely affect the
safety and handling of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, tire clearance, and
speedometer calibration.
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that is
not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
741
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
225/60 R16 98H
225 - Tire width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
98 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5 JX16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below shows many of the
different speed ratings currently
being used for passenger car. The
speed rating symbol is part of the tire
size designation on the sidewall of
the tire. This symbol corresponds to
that tire's designed maximum safe
operating speed.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maintenance
427
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Uniform tire quality grading
The following information relates to
the tire grading system developed by
the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) for grading
tires by tread wear, traction and tem-
perature performance.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. However, performance
may differ from the norm because of
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on Kia vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are A, B and C. The grades
represent the tires ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C. The grades repre-
sent the tire’s resistance to the gener-
ation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor labo-
ratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tires to
degenerate and reduce tires life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tires failure. Grade C corre-
sponds to a level of performance
which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades A and B represent higher lev-
els of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required
by the law.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2GHN741
Tread wear XXX Traction X Temperature X
743
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Checking a tire life
If any tires that are over 6 years
based on the manufacturing date,
tire strength and performance
decline with age naturally (even if the
tires are not used like a spare tire).
Therefore, the tires should be
replaced by new ones including the
spare tire.You can find the manufac-
turing date on the tire sidewall (pos-
sibly only on the inside of the wheel),
which has DOT marking. DOT is seri-
al numbers on tires, which consist of
a combination of numbers and
English letters. You can check the
manufacturing date to the last four
position of the DOT.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1602 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2002.
WARNING
A tire more than 6 years old may
cause separation of the cord
layers inside the tire leading to
loss of vehicle or a serious
injury. Therefore, make sure to
check the manufacturing date
and replace the old tire in 6
years after the tire manufactur-
ing date.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tires failure.This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
Maintenance
447
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
BULB REPLACEMENT
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
Headlight bulb replacement
✽✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is
caused by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and outside.
This is similar to the condensation on
your windows inside your vehicle
during the rain and doesn’t indicate
a problem with your vehicle. If the
water leaks into the lamp bulb cir-
cuitry, have the vehicle checked by
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake
and ensure that the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position to avoid sudden move-
ment of the vehicle and burning
your fingers or receiving an
electric shock.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary
tools, the correct bulbs and the
expertise, consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer. In many
cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because
other parts of the vehicle must
be removed before you can get
the bulb. Especially if you must
remove the front bumper to
replace the light bulbs in the
front of the vehicle. This may
result in damage to the vehicle.
2GHN5102
➀ Headlight (High)
➁ Headlight (Low)
➂ Front fog light
➃ Position light
➄ Front turn signal light
➅ Side mark light
745
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the engine compartment
shroud.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb
socket-connector.
5. Unsnap the headlight bulb retain-
ing wire by depressing the end
and pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the head-
light assembly.
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never
touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed
in a headlight.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediate-
ly and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
1GHA4232GHA744
Maintenance
467
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7. Install a new headlight bulb and
snap the headlight bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
8. Connect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
9. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlight (HID type), position
and front fog light, turn signal
light and side mark light bulb
replacement
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia Dealer.
* HID : High Intensity Discharge
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
747
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Interior lights bulb replace-
ment
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
CAUTION
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
2GHA424
OFF
DOOR
ON
2GHA746
1GHA561
1GHA431
1GHA432
Front map lamp
Center dome lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
Trunk room lamp
Glove box lamp
Maintenance
487
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
License plate lights bulb
replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a cross-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
Door courtesy and foot lamp
bulb replacement
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia Dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
1. Open the trunk lid.
2GHA747
1GHA433
1GHA511
1GHA427/1GHA428
Door courtesy lamp
Foot lamp
➀ Rear turn signal light
➁ Stop and tail light
749
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2. Remove the service cover by turn-
ing the plastic screw counterclock-
wise and removing the cover.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it until
the tabs on the bulb align with the
slots in the socket. Pull the bulb
out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Replace the service cover and
tighten the screw.
1GHA430
1GHA429
1GHA501
Maintenance
507
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Tail, back-up and high mount-
ed stop light bulb replacement
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia Dealer.
➀ High mounted stop light
➁ Tail light
➂ Back-up light
1GHA5008
751
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended lubricants
To help achieve proper engine and
powertrain performance and durabil-
ity, use only lubricants of the proper
quality. The correct lubricants also
help promote engine efficiency that
results in improved fuel economy.
Engine oils labeled Energy
Conserving Oil are now available.
Along with other additional benefits,
they contribute to fuel economy by
reducing the amount of fuel neces-
sary to overcome engine friction.
Often, these improvements are diffi-
cult to measure in everyday driving,
but in a year’s time, they can offer
significant cost and energy savings.
*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Classification
Engine oil
*¹
API Service SL or above, ILSAC GF-3 or above
Automatic transaxle fluid DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III
Power steering fluid PSF-IV
Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Maintenance
527
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
✽✽
NOTICE
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug,
or dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (starting and oil
flow). Lower viscosity engine oils can
provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however,
higher viscosity engine oils are
required for satisfactory lubrication in
hot weather. Using oils of any viscos-
ity other than those recommended
could result in engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-
20,5W-30 (API SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, the engine oil is not available in your country,
select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
753
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
EXTERIOR CARE
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do not
wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle is
warm.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment may cause the
failure of electrical circuits
located in the engine compart-
ment.
• Pay extreme attention to wash
the engine compartment by
using water.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Maintenance
547
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents con-
taining highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
755
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Maintenance
567
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any acid detergent. It
may damage and corrode the alu-
minum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
757
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTERIOR CARE
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil from con-
tacting the dashboard because they
may cause damage or discoloration.
If they do contact the dashboard,
wipe them off immediately. See the
instructions that follow for the proper
way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appear-
ance and fire-resistant proper-
ties.
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Specifications / 8-2
Specifications
10
Specifications
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Dimensions Weights
Item in (mm)
Overall length 196.0 (4,979)
Overall width 72.8 (1,850)
Overall height 58.5 (1,486)
Front tread 61.8 (1,570)
Rear tread 61.4 (1,560)
Wheelbase 110.2 (2,800)
SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications given here are for general information only. Please check with an authorized Kia dealer for more
precise and more up-to-date information.
Refer to the label describing GVWR & GAWR weights
attached to your vehicle.
(see page 5-21, Label information)
83
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Specifications
Engine Electrical system
Item Gasoline Engine
BoreXStroke 3.66 in X 3.38 in (93 mm X 85.8 mm)
Displacement 3497 cc (213.3 cu.in)
Compression Ratio 10.0
Size Gasoline Engine
Battery 12V / 80AH (20HR)
Alternator 13.5V / 120A
Starter 12V-1.2kW
Spark Plug
Gap 1.0 mm ~ 1.1 mm
Specification PFR5N-11, RC10PYPB4
Specifications
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Gear ratio
Tires
Item Front Rear
Tire size 225/60R16 98H 225/60R16 98H
30 (210) 30 (210)
Wheel size 6.5J x 16 6.5J x 16
Wheel lug nut torque 65~79 65~79
lb·ft (kg·m, N·m) (9~11, 88~107) (9~11, 88~107)
Inflation pressure
psi (kPa)
Engine Gasoline Engine
Gear Automatic transaxle
1st 3.789
2nd 2.057
3rd 1.421
4th 1.039
5th 0.731
Reverse 3.865
F.G.R 3.333
85
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Specifications
Light Bulbs
1)
HID(High Intensity Discharge) type
2)
With sunroof
* This mark indicates the filament is not used
Capacities
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (High/Low) 55/55 or 35
1)
Front turn signal lights (LED type) 13.2
Position lights 5
Side mark lights 5
Front fog lights (if equipped) 55
Stop and tail lights 28/8
Rear turn signal lights 28/8*
Back-up lights 16
High mounted stop light (LED type) 2.54
License plate lights 5
Front map lamp 5 or 10
2)
Center dome lamp 10
Door courtesy lamps 5
Vanity mirror lamps 3
Trunk room lamp 5
Foot lamp 5
Glove box lamp 5
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1
4.5 qt. (4.3 l)
API Service SL or above,
(with filter change) ILSAC GF-3 or above
Transaxle
9.0 qt. (8.5 l)
DIAMOND ATF SP-III,
fluid SK ATF SP-III
Power steering 1.1 qt. (1.0 l) PSF-IV
Coolant
10.8 qt.
Ethylene glycol base for
(
10.2
l) aluminum radiator
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 qt.
FMVSS116 DOT-3
(
0.7~0.8
l) or DOT-4
Fuel
18.5 gal Unleaded gasoline with
(70 l) AKI 87 or higher
*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the page 7-52.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Toll free consumer assistance / 9-2
Emergency roadside assistance / 9-2
Trip interruption / 9-2
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country / 9-3
Electrical equipment / 9-4
Reporting safety defects / 9-5
Purchasing factory authorized manuals / 9-6
Consumer assistance (U.S. only)
Consumer assistance
29
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new 2006 model
Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is delivered to the
first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-service
date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60
months/60000 miles.
Toll Free Consumer Assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed
from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday
and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia.
For more information regarding assistance available,
please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual.
Emergency Roadside Assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24
hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing
1-800-333-4Kia.
Kia has set up a network of over 17,000 roadside assis-
tance providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel,
require a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia
Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch (at no
charge to you) someone to deliver a small quantity of
gas, change a flat tire with your inflated spare, or arrange
a battery jump to allow you to proceed to your destina-
tion. Kia also has a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to
help you when you’re locked out of your Kia, also at no
charge.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi-
cle undriveable, Kia’s Roadside Assistance
Representative will arrange to transport your vehicle to
the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service loca-
tion.
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport
vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this serv-
ice. In the event that Kia does not have a dealer or an
alternative service location available in a particular loca-
tion, Kia will work with a reputable local service facility to
ensure that you receive prompt service. Warranty repairs
are performed at no cost.
Trip Interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the
event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more
than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require
more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse-
ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental car expens-
es. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100 per day
subject to a three day maximum limit per incident, and
you are required to contact the Kia Roadside Assistance
Center to obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the
Kia Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for
trip interruption benefits, they will assist you in making
the necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles,
expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or
other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
93
Consumer assistance
Registering Your Vehicle in a Foreign Country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country,
you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in
that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle
in a foreign country, you may experience the following
problems and should therefore consider the possibility of
having to deal with them:
1.The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause
damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and
other fuel-related parts which may not be covered
under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.
2.We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave
the country in which you purchased your Kia as a new
and register it in another country, problems arising from
the use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not sub-
ject to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like
yours may not be marketed in the new country of reg-
istration, parts, servicing techniques and tools neces-
sary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical
specifications required by the government may vary
enough from the country of purchase to cause addi-
tional problems.
3.There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area
in which you plan to register your vehicle.You may addi-
tionally experience difficulty in obtaining services in a
foreign country for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob-
lems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of
service outside of the United States.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Consumer assistance
49
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per-
form under all reasonably expected operating conditions.
However, before any additional electrical equipment is
installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia
Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war-
ranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is
installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi-
cle, including such systems as the engine control system,
the audio system and the electrical charging system and
thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may
incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its
components or systems that may result from the installa-
tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied,
or recommended for installation by, Kia.
Installation of a Mobile Two-Way Radio System
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly,
or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other
electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid
damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer
concerning the proper equipment and installation.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
95
Consumer assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
If you believe your vehicle has a defect which could
cause an accident or could cause injury or death, you
should inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) immediately, in addition to noti-
fying Kia Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation. A recall and remedy campaign may be
ordered if a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, DC 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehi-
cle safety from the Auto Safety Hotline.
All correspondence to Kia Motors America, Inc. concern-
ing safety issues and defects should be forwarded to:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Consumer assistance
69
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PURCHASING FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS (U.S. ONLY)
The following publications covering the operation and
servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Kia by call-
ing the toll-free phone number. For manuals prior to the
year shown below, call 1-866-542-6268.
Valid only for sales within the U.S.. Canadian owners
should contact their Authorized Kia Dealer.
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro-
cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It
is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by provid-
ing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electri-
cal circuit in your vehicle.
Owner’s manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating
procedures for the vehicle.
Amanti
UH060 PS 010
UH060 PS 011
UH060 PS 013
Amanti
Amanti
6
6
6
89.00
49.00
20.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-866-542-6268
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. - 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Index
Index
210
Air Bag - Advanced Supplemental Restraint System . 3-60
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Air Conditioner (Specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
System Operation Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Air Intake Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Alignment, Tire Balance and Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Anti-Theft Steering Column Lock,
Ignition Switch and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Automatic
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Power Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 7-25
Transaxle (Specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Transaxle Fluid Level, Checking the . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Window Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Balance, Wheel Alignment and Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Service, for Best . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Before Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Belts,
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Pre-tensioner, seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Blade Replacement, Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Blades, Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Brake
Fluid Level, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13, 7-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
System, Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Wear Indicators, Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Break-In Process, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Capacities (Specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Capacity, Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Care
of the Safety Belt System, Proper Use and . . . . . . . 3-47
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
B
C
10 3
Index
Catalytic Converters, Operating Precautions for . . . . . 5-4
Chains
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Charging System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) Light . . . . . . . 4-40
Child
Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Safety lock, rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Children
Restraint of Infants and Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Restraint of Larger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Cleaner, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Cleaning
Interior Window Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Upholstery and Interior Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Clock
Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32, 4-33
Compartment, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Console Storage, center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Consumer Assistance (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Coolant, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Coolant Level, Checking the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Cooling System, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Cruise Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Day/Night Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Defrost Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Defroster
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Disc Brake Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Door
Ajar Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Locks from inside the vehicle, operating . . . . . . . . 3-11
Locks from outside the vehicle, operating . . . . . . . . 3-9
Child safety lock, rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Conditions, Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Conditions, Hazardous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
In Flooded Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Dual Temperature Control Selection Button . . . . . . . 4-56
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D
Index
410
Economical Operation, Suggestions for . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Electrical
Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
System (Specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Electronic stability program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Emergency
In Case of an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Engine
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Exhaust Gas Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Oil and Filter, Changing the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Oil and Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Oil Level, Checking the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Oil Pressure Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Starting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Exhaust Gas Precautions, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Exterior
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Fan Speed Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Filler Lid, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Engine Oil and Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Finish
Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Flasher, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53, 6-2
Flat Tire, If You Have a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Flooded Areas, Driving in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fluids, Lubricants and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Fuel
Filler Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Level Warning, Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Fuse/Relay Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Gasoline
Engine (unleaded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Containing Acohol and Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
E
F
G
10 5
Index
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53,6-2
Hazardous Driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Headlight
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Headrest adjustment
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
HLA (Hydraulic Lash Adjustment) Noise . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Homelink® Wireless Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
If You Have a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
And Anti-Theft Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Illumination, Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Indicators, Warnings and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Infants and Small Children, Restraint of . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Inflation Pressures (Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Inspections, Necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system . . . . . . 9-4
Instrument
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32, 4-33
Panel Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Panel Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Trim, Cleaning the Upholstery and . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Window Glass, Cleaning the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Intermittent Wipers, Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Keyless Entry, remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Key Reminder Warning Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Knowing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
H
I
J
K
Index
610
Label
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Tire Specification/Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Vehicle Certification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Lamp, door courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Lap/Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Webbing, Cleaning the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Light
Bulbs (Specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Bulb Replacement, Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Bulb Replacement, License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Bulb Replacement, Rear Combination . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
Lighting, Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Lights, interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Locks
From inside the vehicle, operating door . . . . . . . . . 3-11
From outside the vehicle, operating door . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Low Fuel Level Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Low Brake Fluid Level Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Lubricant Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Main Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Aluminum Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Bright Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Normal - Schedule 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Severe - Schedule 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Service, Scheduled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Mirror
Day/Night Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Outside Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Mode selection Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Night, Driving at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
L M
N
O
10 7
Index
Oil
And Filter, Changing the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Engine and Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Filter, Engine Oil and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Level, Checking the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Pressure Warning, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
One-Touch Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Owner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13, 7-22
Brake and Brake Fluid Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 7-24
Steering Fluid Level, Checking the . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Pregnant Women, Restraint of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Proper Use and Care of the Safety Belt System . . . . . 3-47
Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Rain, Driving in the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Rear
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Door Child Safety Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Lap/Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Rearview Mirrors
Day/Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Recharging, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Recliner,
Adjusting the Driver’s seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Adjusting seatback (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . 3-26
Recommended
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
SAE Viscosity Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Registering Your Vehicle in a Foreign Country . . . . . . 9-3
Relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Reminder Warning Chime, Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Remote Keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Restraint
Of Infants and Small Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Of Large Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Of Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
System, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
System, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
R
Index
810
Roadside Assistance, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Road Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Rocking the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rotation, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Into the auto lock mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
System, Proper Use and Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Warning Light and Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Into the Auto Lock mode, placing a passenger . . . . 3-53
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Schedule 1- Normal Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Schedule 2- Service Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Scheduled Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Adjustment, Driver’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Adjusting the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Severe maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Spare Tire
Removing the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Special Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Starting
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Steering
Column Lock, Ignition Switch and Anti-Theft . . . . . 4-2
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 7-24
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 7-25
Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Suggestions for Economical Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Sunglass Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Switch, Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Temperature
Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Gauge, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Tie-down Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Tilt Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Tips
On Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
For Towing a Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Tire
Balance, Wheel Alignment and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S
T
10 9
Index
Quality Grading, Uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21, 7-39
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Size Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Speed Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Tires
And Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Toll-Free Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
With a Vehicle Other Than a Tow Truck . . . . . . . . 6-17
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Trailer
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Transaxle, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 7-25
Trip
Interrruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Two-Way Radio System, Installation of a Mobile . . . . 9-4
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Upholstery and Interior Trim, Cleaning the . . . . . . . . 7-57
Vehicle
At A Glance, Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Break-In Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Driving Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Knowing Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Rocking the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Warning
And Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Washer
Fluid Level, Checking the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Wipers and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Weights (Specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Wheel
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Aluminum, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Size Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Wheels, Tires and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U
V
W
Index
1010
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Glass, Cleaning the Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Windows, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Wiper
Blade Replacement, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Wipers
And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Variable Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
One-Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Your Vehicle At A Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Y
